Manual Filtro de Prensa

INAB Automaton AB
Box 857
781 28 Borlänge
Sweden
Tel:+46-243 794230
Fax:+46-243 794235
Internet: www.inab.se
E-mail: info@inab.se
MANUAL HIDRÁULICO
Customer: Metso Minerals (Sala) AB
Ustomer de C: L-260 302
Máquina: VPA 1530-60
Proyecto: Cerro Corona, Peru

INAB Ingeniörsbyrå AB
Box 857
781 28 Borlänge
Sweden
Tel:+46-243 794230
Fax:+46-243 794235
Internet: www.inab.se
E-mail: info@inab.se
DESCRIPCIÒN DEL FUNCIONAMIENTO 1
INSTRUCCIONES PARA EL SISTEMA HIDRÁULICO 2
INSTALACIÓN 3
PUESTA EN SERVICIO 4
OPERACIÓN 5
MANTENIMIENTO 6
LOCALIZACIÓN DE FALLOS 7
PIEZAS DE REPUESTO 8
PLANOS Y ESQUEMAS DE DATOS 9
HOJAS DE DATOS, APÉNDICES 1 - 10. 10
Edición 1 L-260 302 06-W22 Index 0 1/1

Filtro prensa Descripción del
funcionamiento
VPA 1530-60
SISTEMA HIDRÁULICO
FILTRO PRENSA METSO MINERALS VPA1530-60
Dibujo de la disposición L1-060504-303

Ver esquema de circuito H1-060504-301 y
lista de piezas H4-060504-302
1. DESCRIPCIÓN DEL FUNCIONAMIENTO
El sistema hidráulico consiste en:
1.1 Depósito hidráulico
1.2 Sistema de baja presión
1.2.1 Filtros
1.2.2 Válvulas limitadoras de presión
1.3 Sistema de alta presión
1.4 Funcionamiento
1.4.1 Funcionamiento
1.4.2 Compuertas
edición 1 L-260 302 06-W22 Descripción del funcionamiento 1 / hidráulico 1/5

funcionamiento
VPA 1530-60
1.1 Depósito hidráulico

El depósito tiene un volumen de 2.300 litros y está equipado
con:
- Mirilla con termómetro
- Monitor de nivel 18 con microinterruptores
- Monitor de temperatura 19 , ajuste adecuado 20 a 95Cº
- Filtro de aire 20
- Escotilla de inspección
1.2 Sistema de baja presión
El sistema de baja presión consiste en 4 bombas (8),

montadas en el mismo eje y accionadas por el mismo
motor eléctrico.
Por ello, el caudal de todas las bombas deberá ser el mismo.
1.2.1 Filtros
Cuatro filtros de paso total (12, 13, 14 y 15) con indicador

visual de suciedad van montados en el lado de salida de cada
bomba de baja presión.
1 filtro de paso total (93) con indicador visual de suciedad va

montado en la salida de la bomba de alta presión.

funcionamiento
VPA 1530-60
1.2.2 Válvulas limitadoras de presión
Las válvulas limitadoras de presión (38, 39, 40 y 41) limitan la

presión de cada bombas.
Ajuste aproximadamente 3.5 MPa.
La presión se lee en los manómetros (17).
La válvula eléctrica (26) H1 descarga las válvulas limitadoras
de presión y
Descarga el aceite en el depósito .
El imán sacado en la válvula (26) H1 significa que el sistema
de baja presión está presurizado.
1.3 Sistema de alta presión
La bomba de alta presión (5) es una bomba de émbolo de

presión compensada.
El ajuste de presión en la bomba es de 20 MPa.
La presión se lee en el manómetro (33).
La válvula de seguridad (11) en el circuito de alta presión está
enroscada completamente, lo cual significa 25 MPa.
La bomba de alta presión suministra aceite para:
-Mover las compuetas
-Control piloto de las válvulas direccionales (46 a 49).
-Cierre de alta presión del filtro prensa.

funcionamiento
VPA 1530-60
1.4 Funcionamiento
1.4.1 La prensa se encuentra en posición abierta.

Se retrae el imán B de la válvula (26) H1.
Las válvulas (38 a 41) están en operación.
Se retrae el imán A de la válvula (23) H3,
con lo cual las válvulas (46 a 49)
Adoptan la posición P en A y el aceite fluye de B a T.
Entonces los cilindros comienzan a cerrar la prensa.

El interruptor limitador de posición indica que se ha realizado
el cierre de baja presión.
Se interrumpe la señal al imán B de la válvula (26)H1 .
Se dirige el aceite de baja presión procedente
de la bomba (8) al depósito.
Se retrae el imán B de la válvula (25)H2.
El aceite de la alta presión va de P a B en la válvula
(25) mediante las válvulas de retención con mando
piloto (28 a 31).
Las válvulas de retención (42 a 45) no permiten que llegue

alta presión a la Sección de baja presión.
El aceite de alta presión va al lado negativo de los cilindros a
través de las Válvulas (46 a 49) ,
con lo cual se cierra completamente la prensa.
A una presión de unos 17 MPa, el presostato (50)P1
indica que la prensa está lista para el llenado.
La bomba (8) está parada durante el prensado de
alta presión.

funcionamiento
VPA 1530-60
Descarga-apertura de la prensa
Se retrae el imán A en la válvula (25)H2.

La presión alta pasa por la válvula 16 y abre
las válvulas piloto de retención (28 a 31).
La alta presión en los cilindros pasa entonces a través de A a
P en las válvulas (46 a 49) a través de las válvulas (28 a31) y
a través de la válvula (55), con la cual se puede ajustar el
tiempo de descarga de forma que todo funcione suavemente,
y seguidamente a través de la válvula (25)H2 al depósito.
Entonces se desconecta la energía eléctrica
a la válvula (25)H2.
Al cabo de unos segundos, se arranca la bomba (8).
Se retrae el solenoide B de la válvula (26)H1.
Se retrae el solenoide B de la válvula (23)H3.
Esto inicia el movimiento de apertura y la prensa pasa
a la posición abierta.
Las válvulas (26)H1 y (23)H3 son desconectadas por el
indicador de posición límite en la prensa abierta.
1.4.2 Compuertas
Las compuertas son controladas por las válvulas

(54)H5 y (64)H4.
Las válvulas reductoras (52 y 53) reducen la presión alta a
un nivel adecuando, de unos 9 MPa.
Los cierres hidráulicos (56 y 57) mantienen las compuertas en

la posición deseada, abierta o cerrada.
La velocidad de apertura o cierre de las compuertas se puede
regular mediante las válvulas (58 y 59).

DRAWING
1/8
CIRCULATION
2/8
LOW PRESSURE CLOSING
3/8
HIGH PRESSURE CLOSING
4/8
HIGH PRESSURE DRAINAGE
5/8
PRESS OPENING
6/8
HATCH OPEN
7/8
HATCH CLOSE
8/8
Filtro prensa Instalación hidráulica
VPA 1530-60
2. INSTRUCCIONES PARA EL SISTEMA HIDRÁULICO
2.1 Generalidades
2.2 Normas de seguridad
edición 1 L-260 302 06-W22 Instalación hidráulica 1/3

VPA 1530-60
2. INSTRUCCIONES PARA EL SISTEMA HIDRÁULICO
2.1 Generalidades
Para que la instalación funcione debidamente durante largo

tiempo, los componentes requieren uso y
mantenimiento adecuando.
Para el funcionamient sin problemas,
el personal de operación deberá prestar atención a:
- las instrucciones de instalación y oeración
- los datos técnicos en las hojas de datos bajo la solapa 10
2.2 Normas de seguridad
Leer el manual de operación y mantenimiento en su totalidad

antes de la puesta en servicio del sistema hidráulico.
Prestar atención especial a las normas de seguridad.
Las tareas de mantenimiento mecánico o eléctrico

sólo debéran realizarlas personal cualificado.
Una persona responsable deberá inspeccionar

los trabajos de mantenimiento y reparación
una vez concluidos, antes de poner de nuevo
en marcha el equipo hidráulico,
controlando los puntos siguientes:
- el trabajo ha sido realizado correctamente

VPA 1530-60
- funcionamiento del equipo de seguridad

- se han montado debidamente todas las guardas
- se han retirado todas las herramientas y equipo de trabajo
Si surge una situación de emergencia, parar el equipo

con el interruptor de parada de emergencia más cercano.
Prohibido hacer intervención alguna en el equipo sin
desconectar la alimentación de energía.
Las autoridades locales de salud y seguridad pueden

promulgar instrucciones de trabajo y seguridad adicionales
a las de este manual.
Evitar la soldadura en equipos mecánicos o eléctricos.

Si es necesario soldar,habrá que observar lo siguiente:
- no efectuar la soldadura mientras no se haya

desconectado la corriente al equipo
- colocar la tierra cerca de la zona de soldadura
- la corriente de soldadura no deberá atravesar
componentes hidráulicos
- proteger las partes expuestas contra los daños y las
quemaduras por salpicaduras de soldadura
INAB Automation AB no acepta responsabilidad alguna de

daños materiales o personales debidos a que no se hayan
seguido las instrucciones de los manuals o no se hayan
adoptado precauciones adecuadas durante el manejo,
funcionamiento, mantenimiento o reparación, incluso en
el caso de que tales precauciones no estén expresamente
indicadas en el manual.

Filtro prensa Instalación
VPA 1530-60
3. INSTALACIÓN
3.1 Instrucciones de seguridad
3.2 Limpieza
3.3 Sistema de tuberías
3.4 Componentes hidráulicos
3.4.1 Válvulas hidráulicas
3.4.2 Otros componentes hidráulicos
edición 1 L-260 302 06-W22 Instalación 1/4

VPA 1530-60
3. INSTALACIÓN
3.1.1 Antes de iniciar la instalación:
Controlar con los planos y la lista de piezas que están

presentes todas las piezas de repuesto.
El bastidor de acero que va a soportar el equipo tiene

que estar controlado y aprobado para el montaje
y la instalación del equipo.
3.1.2 Manipulación del equipo
Manejar siempre el equipo con cuidado para la

carga y el transporte.
Usar los cáncamos de izado y/o seguir las instrucciones
especiales de manipulación en caso aplicable.

VPA 1530-60
3.1.3 Izado
Efectuar la instalación según las normas locales

de seguridad y la práctica general de montaje.
Prestar atención especial a los puntos siguientes:
- El equipo sólo puede izarse usando aparejos

de izado adecuados y según las normas locales de seguridad.
- Fijar bien las partes sueltas u oscilantes antes de

iniciar el izado.
- Está terminantemente prohibido a todas las

personas mantenerse en la. zona de riesgo bajo
una carga suspendida.
- Mantener la aceleración y deceleración de izado

dentro de los límites de.seguridad.
- Usar los cáncamos de izado de los componentes.
Si no hay cáncamos de izado,
levantar los componentes de forma segura.
3.1.4 Soldadura
- Colocar la tierra cerca de la zona de soldadura.

- La corriente de soldadura no deberá atravesar
componentes hidráulicos.
- Proteger las partes expuestas contra los daños
y las quemaduras por salpicaduras de soldadura.

VPA 1530-60
3.2 Limpieza
Mantener siempre el más alto grado de limpieza para la

instalación de equipo hidráulico.
Mantener los componentes nuevos y reparados,
las secciones de tubos, los tubos y las mangueras bien
sellados hasta el momento de montaralos.
Montar los tubos sin presión.

Cortar los tubos con cuidado.
3.4 Componentes hidráulicos
3.4.1 Válvulas hidráulicas
Mantener las válvulas selladas hasta el momento de

montarlas.
Limpiar minuciosamente las superficies de encaje antes del
montaje.
Apretar los tornillos de fijación al par indicado en la hoja de
datos correspondiente.
Seguir las instrucciones en la hoja de datos correspondiente.

Filtro prensa Puesta en servicio
VPA 1530-60
4. PUESTA EN SERVICIO
4.2 Preparativos
4.3 Pruebas
edición 1 L-260 302 06-W24 Puesta en servicio 1/6

VPA 1530-60
4. PUESTA EN SERVICIO
En as zonas cercanas a piezas en movimiento o en otras

zonas de riesgo sólo se deberá permitir el acceso al personal
necesario para la puesta en servicio.
Sólo podrá estar presente el personal del proveedor

de la maquinaria y el personal de mantenimiento u operación

VPA 1530-60
4.2 Preparativos
- ¿Se ha limpiado el despósito hidráulico?
- ¿Se han limpiado y conectado correctamente

todos los tubos?
- ¿Están apretados todos los acoplamientos?
- ¿Se han conectado todos los tubos y

componentes hidráulicos según el
esquema hidráulico?
- ¿Se han montado correctamente

la bomba y/o el motor eléctrico?
- ¿Tiene el filtro la finura adecuada?
- ¿Se ha llenado el despósito con el aceite adecuado hasta el

nivel máximo?
- Comprobar que los componentes son adecuados para la

presión de
operación.
- Comprobar que se han efectuado correctamente todas las

conexiones eléctricas.
Este controlse efectúa, por ejemplo, mediante la “operación
en seco” de todas las funciones eléctricas por mediación del
sistema de control.
- Controlar las funciones de seguridad que es posible controlar.

VPA 1530-60
4.3 Pruebas
- Abrir las válvulas de aspiración en las bombas.
- ¿Se han instalado las válvulas del sistema

en la posición correcta?
- ¿Giran los motores en el sentido correcto?

NOTA: El sentido de rotación sólo puede controlarse
después de llenar de aceite el depósito y abrir
la válvula de aspiración en la bomba.
- Abrir las válvulas reductoras de presión.
Arrancar la bomba de baja presión 8.

Escuchar si se oyen sonidos anormales.
Si está todo bien, dejar la bomba en marcha para filtrar
el aceite unos 30 minutos.
Para la bomba de baja presión.
Arrancar la bomba de alta presión 5.

Escuchar.
Si está todo bien, introducir10 MPa.
Poner la válvula reductora 22 a 2 MPa.
Arrancar la bomba de baja presión 8.

Ajustar las válvulas 38 a 41 a aproximadamente 3 MPa.
Probar las funciones hidráulicas accionándolas manualmente.
Purgar el aire de todos los cilindros.

Accionar la prensa ente las posiciones abierta y
cerrada sin conectar alta presión,
y controlar la alineación paralela.

VPA 1530-60
Cualquier desviación respecto de la alineación paralela al

abrir la prensa
se puede corregir con las válvulas de purga.
Cerrar las válvulas del filtro prensa (105-108).

Se pueden ajustar hasta 3 válvulas.
Abrir las válvulas del filtro prensa (60-63).

Se pueden ajustar hasta 3 válvulas.
Comprobar que no hay fugas.

Controlar el nivel del aceite en el despósito y
rellenar si es necesario.
Ajustar la válvula 11, enroscar el

volante manual completamente hacia adentro
en la derecha y bloquearlo.
Accionar la prensa a la posición cerrada y liberar

la válvula 26 (H1).
Cerrar la bomba de baja presión 8.
Abrir alta presión, tirar del imán B an la válvula 25 (H2)

y la alta presión cierra entonces la prensa.
Controlar si hay fugas.
Aumentar lentamente la presión a 20 MPa.
Controlar si hay fugas.
Apertura de la prensa.

VPA 1530-60
Tirar del imán A en la válvula 25 (H2).
Ajustar la acción de descarga con la válvula 55.
Una vez efectuada la descarga, los manómetros 51

indican 0 MPa.
Liberar la presión en la válvula 25 (H2).
Arrancar la bomba 8.
Tirar del imán B en la válvula 26 (H1) y

del imán B en la válvula 23 (H3).
La prensa efectúa su movimiento de apertura.
Controlar la alineación paralela durante el

movimiento de apertura.
Accionar la prensa hacia adelante y atrás unas

cuantas veces y controlar la alineación paralela.
Desconectar los motores eléctricos (bombas).
Controlar el nivel del aceite.
Controlar la temperatura.
Controlar el indicador de nivel en el filtro,

reemplazando el cartucho si procede.

Filtro prensa Operación
VPA 1530-60
5. OPERACIÓN
5.2 Antes del arranque
5.3 Arranque
5.4 Puntos de control
5.4.1 Inspección diaria
5.4.2 Inspección semanal
5.4.3 Inspección mensual
5.4.4 Inspección semestral
edición 1 L-260 302 06-W22 Operación 1/3

VPA 1530-60
5. OPERACIÓN
Seguir las instrucciones en el manual de operación

de Metso Mineral.
El equipo sólo deberá utilizarlo personal cualificado.
Si suena la alarma, seguir al pie de la letra

las medidas estipuladas.
5.2 Antes del arranque
Si se han efectuado trabajos de mantenimiento o

reparación, controlar que todas las válvulas se
encuentran en la posición de operación.
Controlar el nivel del aceite.
5.3 Arranque
Seguir las instrucciones del manual de operación

de Metso Mineral.

VPA 1530-60
5.4 Puntos de control
5.4.1 Inspección diaria
Controlar diariamente los puntos siguientes en la instalación:
- fugas
- presión
- temperatura del despósito
- nivel del aceite
- indicador de suciedad en filtros
5.4.2 Inspección semanal
Controlar semanalmente los puntos siguientes

en la instalación:
- fugas en el sistema de tuberías

- fugas por los cilindros
- marcas en los émbolos de los cilindros
5.4.3 Inspección mensual
Controlar mensualmente los puntos siguientes

en la instalación:
- temperatura de la bomba
5.4.4 Inspección semestral
Cada seis meses, enviar muesras de aceite

para análisis.
Los resultados del análisis determinarán las medidas
a adoptar.

Filtro prensa Mantenimiento
VPA 1530-60
6. MANTENIMIENTO
6.2 Información general de mantenimiento
6.3 Aceite
6.3.1 Selección de aceite

6.3.2 Equipo suministrado y piezas de
repuesto normales
6.3.3 Componentes preparados para almacenamiento
de larga duración
6.3.4 Llenado de aceite
6.3.5 Cambio de aceite
6.4 Cambio de filtro
6.4.1 Filtro de respiración
6.6 Bombas
6.7 Válvulas
6.7.1 Válvulas de retención
6.7.2 Válvulas direccionales
6.7.3 Válvulas de presión
6.7.4 Válvulas de estrangulación/retención
6.7.5 Monitor de presión
6.7.8 Tubos hidráulicos
edición 1 L-260 302 06-W22 Mantenimiento 1/9

VPA 1530-60
6. MANTENIMIENTO
Leer el manual de operación y mantenimiento en

su totalidad antes de la puesta en servicio
del sistema hidráulico.
Prestar atención especial a las normas de seguridad.
Las tareas de mantenimiento mecánico o eléctrico

sólo deberán realizarlas personal cualificado.
Una persona responsable deberá inspeccionar los

trabajos de mantenimiento y reparación una vez concluidos,
antes de poner de nuevo en marcha el equipo
hidráulico, controlando los puntos siguientes:
- el trabajo ha sido realizado correctamente

- funcionamiento del equipo de seguridad
- se han montado debidamente todas las guardas
- se han retirado todas las herramientas y equipo de trabajo
Si surge una situación de emergencia, parar el equipo

con el interruptor de parada de emergencia más cercano.
Prohibido hacer intervención alguna en el equipo

sin desconectar la alimentación de energía.
Las autoridades locales de salud y seguridad

pueden promulgar instrucciones de trabajo y
seguridad adicionales a las de este manual.

VPA 1530-60
Evitar la soldadura en equipos mecánicos o eléctricos.

Si es necesario soldar, habrá que observar lo siguiente:
- no efectuar la soldadura mientras no se haya desconectado

la corriente al equipo
- colocar la tierra cerca de la zona de soldadura
- la corriente de soldadura no deberá atravesar componentes
hidráulicos
- proteger las partes expuestas contra los daños y
las quemaduras por salpicaduras de soldadura
INAB Automation AB no acepta responsabilidad alguna

de daños materiales o personales debidos a que no se
hayan seguido las instrucciones de los manuales
o no se hayan adoptado precauciones adecuadas durante
el manejo,funcionamiento, mantenimiento o
reparación, incluso en el caso de que tales precauciones
no estén expresamente indicadas en el manual.
6.2 Información general de mantenimiento
Para evitar las paralizaciones fortuitas, es necesario

efectuar el mantenimiento del sistema hidráulico.
Es importante examinar periódicamente el equipo y escuchar

los sonidos de mismo para evitar las averías serias.
En este capítulo se describen los controles y las medidas que

deben realizarse.
Para información más detallada, consultar las hojas de datos
adjuntas a este manual.

VPA 1530-60
6.3 Aceite
6.3.1 Selección de aceite

En la hoja de datos 3-401, Apéndice 1, se encuentra
la lista de requerimientos para elegir aceite hidráulico
de base mineral.
Recomendamos aceites con una viscosidad de VG46
según DIN 51562.
6.3.2 Equipo suministrado y piezas de repuesto normales
El equipo hidráulico y las piezas de repuesto se recubren con

aceite anticorrosión antes de la entrega.
Este aceite protege el equipo y los componentes durante el
transporte y almacenamiento, formando una película protctora
que no se seca.
No es necesario quitarla antes de llenar con aceite normal.
Esto no se aplica si se usan mezclas de agua y glicol.
6.3.3 Componentes preparados para almacenamiento de

larga duración
Los cilindros de repuesto están llenos de aceite anticorroción

para protegerlos durante el almacenamiento.
Antes de montar el cilindro, es necesario vaciar el aceite.
6.3.4 Llenado e aceite
Llenar aceite a través de filtro, ya que el aceite nuevo no tiene

el mismo grado de pureza que el aceite en el sistema.
También se puede efectuar el llenado por medio de una
unidad de llenado separada.

VPA 1530-60
6.3.5 Cambio de aceite
La vida de servicio del aceite depende de las condiciones de

operación del sistema.
Sólo se necesita cambiar el aceite cuando el análisis del
mismo muestre que ha perdido efecto.
Ver también el apartado puntos de control.
Al llenar aceite nuevo, no mezclar aceites diferentes.

Si se cambia de tipo o de marca, habrá que cambiar todo
el aceite.
6.4 Cambio de filtro
6.4.1 Cambiar los filtros de la forma siguiente:
1. Se ha activado (ha saltado) el indicador de suciedad

en los filtros 12 a 15.
2. Desconectar las bombas
3. El manómetro 17 no debe indicar que se ha liberado
a la presión.
4. Aflojar el anillo alrededor de la carcasa del filtro.
5. Sacar el contenedor del filtro recto hacia abajo.
6. Sacar el cartucho de filtro, vaciar el aceite del
contenedor en un recipiente adecuado y
desechar el aceite.
7. Controlar el aro tórico de la carcasa,
cambiándolo si es necesario.
8. Instalar un nuevo cartucho de filtro.
9. Empujar el contenedor del filtro hacia arriba con
el nuevo cartucho al interior de la cabeza del filtro.
10. Enroscar el anillo del filtro en su sitio.

VPA 1530-60
6.4.2 Filtro de respiración 20
El filtro de respiración se cambia con el mismo intervalo

que el filtro de aceite.
1. Aflojar el tornillo en la parte superior de la carcasa del filtro.

2. Levantar y quitar la carcasa.
3. Cambiar el cartucho de filtro.
4. Montar la carcasa en su sitio.
Controlar si hay fugas en las tuberías.

Si se detecta una fuga, rectificar inmediatamente la conexión.
6.6 Bombas
Bomba de baja presión 8.

Escuchar regularmente si hay ruidos anormales en la bomba.
Bomba de alta presión 5.

Escuchar si se oyen ruidos anormales.
La temperatura del aceite drenado deberá ser normalmente
de 15 a 20°C en la totalidad del sistema.
El caudal de drenaje no deberá exceder 3 l/min.

Cuando se instala la bomba 5,
llenar la carcasa de aceite desconectando la manguera
de drenaje de la bomba y llenando la carcasa de aceite
por la conexión de drenaje.

VPA 1530-60
6.7 Válvulas
6.7.1 Válvulas de retención
Las válvulas de retención no necesitan mantenimiento.

Si una válvula de retención no está sellada, puede ser debido
a suciedad o desgaste.
Quitar la válvula de retención, limpiarla y controlarla.
Si persiste la fuga, cambiarla.
Las válvulas piloto de retención pueden bloquearse

por suciedad en sus conductos de control.
En tal caso, quitar la válvula y limpiarla.
6.7.2 Válvulas direccionales
Las válvulas direccionales tienen un alto grado de fiabilidad

operacional.
Las válvulas que están inmóviles durante mucho tiempo en la
misma posición pueden agarrotarse.
Cuando está afectado el imán, se oirá un zumbido.
También hay que controlar si tienen fugas las válvulas.

Si hay fuga entre las superficies de contacto y la válvula,
desmontar la válvula, limpiar las superficies de estanqueidad y
reemplazar el aro tórico.
Si hay partículas, pintura o similar en las superficies

de estanqueidad de las válvulas o bloques
de válvulas durante el montaje, se puede deformar
el cuerpo de la válvula al apretar los tornillos de fijación,
con lo cual se atascará la corredera de la válvula.
Si no funciona la válvula al montarla, cambiarla
por una nueva.

VPA 1530-60
6.7.3 Válvulas de presión
La válvula limitadora de presión 11 se controla probándola.

Si la válvula está demasiado caliente,
será debido a fuga o a instalación incorrecta.
La fuga de la válvula puede ser causada por suciedad

en la superficie de estanqueidad de la válvula.
Se suele remediar el fallo quitando la válvula y limpiándola.
Si no basta con esto, será debido a que están dañadas
las superficies de estanqueidad y etonces habrá
que reemplazar la válvula.
6.7.4 Válvulas de estrangulación
Si la válvula controlada tiene fuga, puede ser debido

a suciedad o desgaste.
Desmontar la válvula, limpiarla y probarla.
Si persiste la fuga, reemplazarla.
Si la válvula de estrangulación está casi cerrada,

puede estar bloqueada por suciedad.
Abrir ligeramente el tornillo de ajuste,
si no sale más aceite, quitar la válvula entera y limpiarla.

VPA 1530-60
6.7.6 Presostato
El presostato instalado en un sistema cuyo nivel de presión

varía suele funcionar sin problemas.
Los niveles de presión en esta instalación hidráulica varián
durante las distintas frecuencias,
lo cual significa que el presostato entra en acción con mucha
frecuencia.
Si no funciona el presostato, cambiarlo por uno nuevo.
Los demás componentes hidráulicos sólo

necesitan comprobar si hay fugas y que
funcionan debidamento.
6.7.8 Tuberías hidráulicas
Cambiar todas las mangueras hidráulicas del sistema

cada 3 años.

Filtro prensa Localización de fallos
VPA 1530-60
7. LOCALIZACIÓN DE FALLOS
7.1 Generalidades
7.2 Presión
7.2.1 Fallos de bombas
7.2.2 Fugas
edición 1 L-260 302 06-W22 Localización de fallos 1/4

VPA 1530-60
7. LOCALIZACIÓN DE FALLOS
7.1 Generalidades
El sistema hidráulico forma parte de una compleja

instalación que hace difícil determinar en qué
parte del sistema se encuentra el fallo.
Cuando hay un fallo mecánico y/o eléctrico,
se suele asumir que se trata de un fallo hidráulico,
ya que es la parte hidráulica la que no funciona.
La localización de fallos en el sistema hidráulico suele se

difícil, debido a la migración de ruidos anormales por
el sistema, lo cual dificulta determinar el
origen exacto del sonido.
Este capítulo contiene consejos prácticos sobre posibles fallos

en el sistema.
No se puede dar una lista completa de los fallos que pueden

surgir en una instalación de este tipo.
Cuando surge un fallo, se necesita experiencia y cuidado para

determinar la ubicación del mismo.
Un consejo es: Comenzar desde el principio.

No tomar por descontado que se cumplen las condiciones
básicas.
¿Hay erergía eléctrica?
¿Está abierta la válvula de estrangulación?, etcétera.

VPA 1530-60
7.2 Presión
Si no se acumula la presión al nivel normal en el

sistema de baja o de alta presión, puede haber dos
causas principales:
7.2.1 Defecto de bomba
Hay defecto en una bomba cuando ésta no suministra

el caudal necesario.
Controlar lo siguiente:
- ¿Funciona el motor eléctrico?

Si no funciona habrá un fallo en el sistema eléctrico.
Si funciona, pasar al párrafo siguiente.
- ¿Sonido anormal?
Tratar de determinar de dónde proviene el sonido,
quitar la unidad correspondiente y reemplazarla o repararla.
- ¿Está entero el acoplamiento del eje?

Esto se examina por el agujero de inspección en
la pieza central.
Si no gira el eje de la bomba, quitar la unidad, controlar
la bomba y el acoplamiento del eje,
y reemplazarlo o repararlo si presenta defectos.
Si gira el eje de la bomba, pasar al párrafo siguiente.
- ¿Está demasiado caliente la bomba?

En caso afirmativo, quitar la bomba y cambiarla por
una nueva.
Si no está demasiado caliente, lo más probable es que
el fallo se encuentre en otra parte del sistema.

VPA 1530-60
7.2.2 Fugas
Si la bomba funciona normalmente, la falta de presión

puede ser debida a fuga de aceite en el sistema.
Ésta puede ser una fuga externa.
Las fugas externas se detectan rápidamente ya que el aceite

sale del sistema y cae el nivel en el despósito.
Las fugas internas son más difíciles de detectar, debido a que

el aceite va del sistema presurizado al sistema de retorno.
Un fallo típico es la fuga por la válvula limitadora de presión,

causada por suciedad o desgaste.
Controlando la temperatura del reorno del despósito puede
ayudar a determinar si hay fuga en el despósito.

STARING UP, MAINTANANCE AND TROUBLSHOOTING
Starting up, maintenance and troubleshooting for

hydraulic plants built by INAB Automation AB AB
This folder has been produced to help you to achieve a long and trouble-free operational
life for your new hydraulic unit.
The unit has normally been test run in our workshop before delivery (see the test run re-
cord), with respect to sealing, pressure, flow and function.
General recommendations, applicable to most systems, are given here. However, it
is important that any special directions given for specific components are followed.
power losses are created which will affect the efficiency of the sys-
Contents tem.
Installation........................Page 1 The hydraulic fluid .......................2
Drawing pipes/hoses .................1 Choosing the purity class..............3 Cleaning of pipes and hoses
Cleaning of pipes/hoses ............1 Starting up.....................................3
Electrical connection.................1 Routine maintenance ....................3 It is extremely important that all pipes/hoses in the hydraulic sys-
Accumulators ............................1 Periodic maintenance....................3 tem are thoroughly cleaned internally.
Filling the system ......................2 Safety ............................................4
They must be completely free of rust and oxide scale and must not
Rinsing the system ....................2 Trouble shooting...........................4
The fluid level ...........................2
be soldered or welded after mounting. The pipes must be manufac-
tured in such a way that they do not need to be clamped into posi-
Installation tion. Sharp edges, burrs and chips in the ends must be removed.
Always use the lifting eyes on the unit where provided, otherwise Connectors should also be cleaned.
place lifting straps under the tank. Ensure that no piping or other Pipes and hoses should be cleaned with a "sliding plug". If a liquid
sensitive parts are damaged during lifting. Never lift by means of sealing agent is used, two threads nearest the end should be left
the hydraulic piping or the electric motor. free.
The position of the hydraulic unit should be shown on the machine Teflon tape should be avoided.
drawing. Ensure that there is sufficient room around the unit for
maintenance even after additional equipment and piping has been Allow all the plugs we have fitted for transporting purposes to re-
installed. Pay particular attention to providing sufficient space for main in position until the pipes are ready to be connected. This
such routine measures as changing filters and checking the oil helps to keep the system as clean as possible.
level. If the unit is equipped with a water cooler, space is required
for water pipes and any accompanying valves.
Electrical connection
Check that the voltage, frequency and amperage of the electric mo-
Try to house the hydraulic unit in a clean and well ventilated envi- tor and other electrically controlled components correspond with
ronment. Under difficult conditions, where the unit may be exposed what is available at the site.
to cooling fluid spray, dirt or intense heat, special protection may
be necessary. Running the pump when dry, or in the wrong direction, for more
than a few seconds can seriously damage it.
Check that the base is level and stable when the unit is finally in
position. Use a mounting which does not loosen or shrink. Also To begin with, start the electric motor for just a short time and
ensure that the base for the hydraulic tank does not amplify the check that the direction of rotation is correct. The direction of rota-
sound. tion is normally indicated by an arrow on the electric motor or on
the spacing piece.
Drawing pipes and hoses The pumps should normally rotate to the right (clockwise as seen
Drawing pipes/hoses between the hydraulic unit and the machine from the end of the shaft).
should be done by experienced fitters. Pipes, connectors and hoses
Left-hand rotating pumps are normally designated with an "L" or
must be adapted to suit the working pressure concerned. All com-
"LH" in the model code.
ponents and piping should be firmly mounted in the base so that no
forces affect the hydraulic piping. Accumulators
Always use sound pipe braces. Gas-filled accumulators are virtually never delivered pre-charged.
The pipes/hoses drawn should be as short as possible and unneces- Before starting, the accumulators must be precharged to the correct
sary pipe bends and angled connections avoided. Always restrict pressure in accordance with the hydraulic diagram.Always use ni-
the number of connectors to a minimum since each connection trogen gas (N2). Follow INAB Ingeniörsbyrå AB recommendations
should be considered as a potential location for leakage. The size of for the charging, mounting and servicing of accumulators. A spe-
pipe/hose should be in accordance with the specifications on the cial charging device should be used.
hydraulic diagram. If the pipes/hoses used are too long and slender,
Revision nr 01 Godkänd 1999-03-03

Dokument nr QE-704 Giltig från 1999-03-03 Sida 1 av 4
Denna handling tillhör INAB Ingeniörsbyrå AB och får inte utan vårt medgivande kopieras, delges tredje man eller användas för annat obehörigt ändamål.
Filling the system The hydraulic fluid
Always make certain that the system is clean internally before the Mineral oil
hydraulic fluid is poured in. The cleaner the hydraulic system is High quality oil which operates within the recommended tempera-
when starting up, the longer the service life and the fewer break- ture range will give long and troublefree operation for the hydraulic
downs there will be. unit.
The hydraulic fluid is the blood of the system. All larger oil suppliers will help in selecting the right quality.
It deserves to be treated with respect. Be sure that the correct fluid Modern hydraulic oils contain many additives. The most important
is used and that it really is clean. Dirt which may normally be seen of which is the anti-wear additive, which must be the equivalent of
and felt can be invisible when mixed with oil. So never let yourself SAE 1183 Class SC, SD or SE.
be deluded by the oil's appearance. Suitable viscosity is dependent on the type of components plus the
Large particles can cause direct breakdowns. But even particles of starting and operating temperatures.
dirt which are so small that they cannot be seen with the naked eye As a general recommendation, the viscosity can be given as 13-55
cause wear to pumps and poor functioning of valves. cSt for industrial units. We also recommend that the purity class be
Do not take any chances. No system has ever broken down because in accordance with ISO 4406.
it was too clean. Fire resistant fluids
Take all possible precautionary measures to keep contaminants Systems which are designed for use with a special type of fire-
away when the fluid is being pumped across from the barrel. Begin resistant fluid cannot be used with any other type of fluid without
by cleaning around the opening of the barrel before it is opened, comprehensive control. Never mix different types of fluid.
and then check that the contents have not already been contami- If the hydraulic system is designed for mineral oil it is unlikely that
nated, e.g. by condensed moisture. Check that the filter in the fill- it can be operated with fire-resistant hydraulic fluids without being
ing hole is in position and that hoses and the pump itself are quite converted.
clean. Fill the tank to the top marking on the level glass. We always
recommend that a special filtering unit be used during filling. This Hydrated fluids require regular inspection of the water content.
can be supplied by INAB Ingeniörsbyrå AB. Ensure that the filler If you plan to use fireresistant hydraulic fluid, contact both the
cap is properly in position after filling. fluid supplier and the component manufacturer for advice.
Rinsing the system It is important to ascertain whether the fluid and components can
operate together and to obtain maintenance directions.
All parts of the system should be rinsed through before the system
is loaded. It is good practice to have a sign next to the filler cap showing what
type of fluid should be used and how filling should be done.
Ideally the system should be rinsed through with the same type of
fluid as that which will be used later, and if this can be rinsed round Synthetic or vegetable oil
at a higher speed than that which will be used during operation. In older machines with, for example, deposits and moisture in the
system and where various types of oil have previously been used,
In a system there are always contaminants present in the pipes.
care should be taken when changing over to a new type of oil. Old
Therefore, all parts of the system should be effectively flushed
deposits and silt can be disturbed if the system is not thoroughly
through in order to remove these. This can be done for example by
cleaned beforehand. It is a good idea to take a sample of the old oil
connecting the pipelines together out at the cylinders.
so that it can be analyzed and tested together with the new oil.
Sensitive valves can be replaced with special rinsing plates for the
Filterability is, as a rule, different with the socalled environmen-
flushing clean process. In certain cases the process can be facili-
tally adapted oils than with mineral oils.
tated by an extra filter being temporarily installed when the system
is rinsed. When mixing different makes of oil, the filterability often suffers.
In a well designed hydraulic system, with large filters, the service
If the hydraulic unit's own pump is used for rinsing, it must be en-
life is nevertheless acceptable.
sured that it only pumps clean oil and that it runs at low pressure.
It is very important that all filters are provided with filter indica-
In those cases where flushing fluid is used, it should be suitable for
tors, preferably with an alarm. Filter indicators can be mounted af-
mixing with hydraulic fluid and be drawn off thoroughly after rins-
terwards if any filter does not already have one.
ing. If the hydraulic oil is used for flushing clean there is no reason
to change it afterwards. It is also important that the oil temperature is not too high. Nor-
mally the temperature should not exceed 50 degrees C in order that
Ensure that the shunt valves in the filter do not open during flush-
the service life of the oil, seals and other components is not short-
ing. Change all filter linings before the system is put into operation.
ened. There should be a thermometer
The fluid level for checking the temperature of the system's hottest point, e.g. on
When the hydraulic system is started for the first time, the fluid the return pipeline prior to the cooler.
level will drop as the pipes and cylinders fill with oil.
Top up the level as soon as possible and never allow it to drop be-
low the minimum marking on the level glass.

6. Set the pressure limiting valve at the lowest possible pressure
Choosing the purity class for satisfactory functioning. In systems with a pressure com-
Operational pensated pump, any pressure limiting valve should be set at
reliability Class of purity Type of system
least 10 bar above the pump control.
7. Check the fluid level again.
Very high ISO/4406 Very high working
requirement pressures 8. Check all connections and installation screws for valves when
ISO 12/9-14/11 Servo & proportional the unit has reached operating temperature. Tighten again
valves where so required.
Long service life
High power 9. Check that the filter is still clean when the system has been op-
erating for a while. If necessary, change the filter lining. For
High ISO14/11-16/13 High working pressures
requirement Proportional valves filters without a dirt indicator, the lining should be first
Long service life changed after 50 hours operation. Then at intervals of 250-500
High power hours depending on the operating conditions. Before the system
Moderate ISO 16/13-18/14 Moderate working
is thoroughly clean the filter linings may need to be changed at
requirement pressures frequent intervals.
Simple components 10 Record the times, temperature, pressure and other information
Limited requirement on which may be needed for maintenance in the future.
service life
Low power 11 Adjust the system pressure in accordance with the information
Low ISO18/14-19/15 Low working pressures on the hydraulic diagram.
requirement Simple components 12 Close all pressure gauge taps when the pressure setting is set,
Without particular as this will increase the service life considerably.
requirement on
service life 13 Never run the system at a higher pressure than that statedwith-
Low power out consulting INAB Ingeniörsbyrå AB.
Store the oil under clean conditions and at indoor temperature in
order to avoid condensation. The barrel should be stored lying on
Routine maintenance
its side so that dirt cannot collect on the end covers. We recommend that preventative maintenance be carried out in
accordance with a prearranged plan. Some of the points which
Starting up should be checked and noted include:
Before starting 1. The machine's cycle time.
1. Check the oil level. 2. The fluid temperature during operation.
2. Open all taps in the suction piping fully. 3. All pressure gauge readings, or via pressure gauge outlets.
3. Fill the housing on all pumps which have drainage piping with 4. Checking the dirt indicators on the filters.
hydraulic oil.
5. Replacing filter linings if so required and cleaning any strain-
4. Find out whether the machine can be started and that no per- ers.
sonnel are in the danger zone.
6. Unusual noise.
Starting
1. If the unit is equipped with a separate filter circuit, this 7. Changing the air filter at least once a year or as indicated. More
often when the air is very contaminated or with large frequent
should be run first. It should run for 1-2 hours to clean the oil in oil output.
the tank.
8. Cleaning the unit and searching for leaks. Tightening or possi-
2. Start the pump motor for a few seconds and check that it is bly changing any leaking couplings and pipes.
running in the right direction.
9. Checking that the cooling system is clean and does not leak.
3. Start-stop the pump motor for intervals of a few seconds until
the pump has taken up the oil. It may be necessary to loosen a 10. Checking the precharging pressure in any accumula-
pipe connection on the pressure side in order to release air. tors.Emptying them first of oil. Always following the manufac-
turer's recommendations for filling with gas.
Do not loosen the connection more than one revolution.
11. Taking an oil sample to check that the particle level corre-
(The pump will sound rough while air remains in the oil.) sponds with the requisite class of purity. Sending the oil sample
4. Run the system manually at low pressure and ensure that it is to the oil supplier or INAB Ingeniörsbyrå AB for analysis.
vented thoroughly. At any venting points oil should come out 12 Measuring the leakage flow from the piston pumps under iden-
which is completely free of air bubbles. If the oil foams in the tical pressure and temperature conditions. Changes in leakage
tank the unit needs to stand for a while so that the air can dis- gives a good indication of the pump's condition. Substantial
appear. In smaller systems it is normally enough to run the cyl- changes in values require further investigation into the cause.
inders between the end positions a few times.
5. Let the system work at low pressure for a while. It is the final Periodic maintenance
flushing clean before the pump is loaded, presupposing that the If, after several years of operation, routine inspections show that
oil flows through the filter. the performance of the plant does not meet specifications, it may be
time for a more general overhaul. During such stops in operations it

may be a suitable time to give the system a thorough clean, particu- 2. With water/oil emulsions the viscosity may be affected by the
larly the inside of the tank. Preferably, a soft plastic scraper should mixing conditions.
be used for flat surfaces, since cloths leave fluff which can cause 3. Blocked suction filter. Remove it and clean. In many modern
problems later when starting up. Before undertaking a large over- systems there is no suction filter.
haul of the system, INAB Ingeniörsbyrå AB should be consulted.
We can give advice on repairs or the replacement of worn parts, An increase in the noise level may be caused by a shaft coupling
plus supplying new gaskets. Gaskets tend to harden after a few which is badly aligned or faulty. Loose plates, e.g. the fan housing
years of operation and replacement reduces the risk of leakage. on the electric motor can cause rattling. Pressure valves which
Hoses in the inlet pipes of pumps and seals at tank inlets are often work continually can squeak, which is normally due to faulty set-
overlooked during overhauls. These may have worn or cracked, ting or too high a flow volume.
giving rise to dirt and air penetration. Too low pressure
Follow the service instructions and ensure that no dirt is left in the 1. Check the pump's direction of rotation.
system when it is reassembled. If necessary run clean using a sepa- 2. Check that the oil is reaching the pump and that the pressure
rate filter circuit. valve or pressure compensator is correctly set.
Servicing should be carried out by personnel who are approved by 3. The pump can only generate pressure if there is a flow resis-
INAB Ingeniörsbyrå AB. tance or loading. Certain systems have pressure off-loading
which results in low pressure, irrespective of what the pressure
Safety valve or pressure compensator is set at.
Secure all machine parts which may swing free or fall of their own
4. Check that you are really reading off the pressure at the right
accord when tubes or valves are dismantled.
point.
Switch off at the safety switch or remove the fuses during all ser-
Too high temperature
vice work.
Industrial hydraulic systems should normally operate at 40 - 60 °C.
Check that the accumulators have been emptied completely before
1. Check that any water cooler actually receives water. The water
any components in the system are loosened. Bear in mind that an
outlet should feel hotter than the inlet and the oil outlet colder
accumulator contains stored energy which can be released despite
than the oil inlet.
the machine being without power.
2. If there is an air cooler its direction of rotation should be
Trouble shooting checked. The air channels may be blocked.
Noise from the pump 3. Check that all pressure valves are set correctly.
In an hydraulic system a high level of noise is probably due to air
4. Check that any pressure off-loading functions.
in the oil. The air admission can be caused by:
5. When a pressure compensated pump also has a pressure limit-
1. Too low an oil level.
ing valve it must be at least 10 bar above the compensator pres-
2. Poor venting when starting up so that air begins to circulate in sure.
the system. An accumulation of air can remain in the suction
6. Feel along the system to see whether there is any place which is
pipe for a long time.
hotter than the other components. This can mean that the com-
3. Air leaks in the suction pipe. Investigate all connections.A ponent concerned has a large internal leakage which is causing
good way to discover leaks is to cover the connections, one by the heat. Change the component.
one, with oil or grease.
7. Check that the oil has the right viscosity.
4. The pump's shaft seal may be broken.
Faulty functioning
5. In conjunction with starting up, air is flushed out of the pipe A component has probably broken. Check with the hydraulic dia-
system and goes down into the tank as small air bubbles. You gram and the parts list. Is it the right component?
can normally see them as a clouding of the oil. It takes a long
Change components or contact INAB Ingeniörsbyrå AB for service
time before these rise to the surface.Cavitation in the pump also
or repair of the component.
results in noise. This may be due to:
1. Too high a viscosity of the oil. This can be due to the wrong
choice of oil, or the oil in the tank being too cold.
When in doubt always contact INAB Automation AB for advice.
Postal address Telephone Fax VAT no
INAB Automation AB SE556157538101

PO Box 321, S-891 27 Örnsköldsvik +46 660 597 50 +46 660 597 45
PO Box 857, S-781 28 Borlänge +46 243 79 42 30 +46 243 79 42 35
PO Box 739, S-931 27 Skellefteå +46 910 71 13 40 +46 910 894 82

Filtro prensa Piezas de repuesto
VPA 1530-60
8. PIEZAS DE REPUESTO
8.1 Generalidades
8.2 Consumibles y elementos de estanqueidad
8.3 Componentes
8.4 Almacenamiento
edición 1 L-260 302 06-W22 Piezas de repuesto 1/2

Filtro prensa Piezas de repuesto
VPA 1530-60
8. PIEZAS DE REPUESTO
8.1 Generalidades
Para garantizar un alto grado de disponibilidad,

el cliente deberá mantener en sus instalaciones un
stock de piezas de repuesto importantes.
Normalmente, los componentes defectuosos se cambian
por componentes nuevos.
Los grupos defectuosos se pueden desechar o reparar.
8.2 Consumibles y elementos de estanqueidad
Cartuchos de filtro, en general se reemplaza el componente

entero si tiene algún defecto.
Mantener un stock de los siguientes componentes

de estanqueidad:
- Aros tóricos para las válvulas.

- Juntas de ejes para las bombas.
- Juntas de escotillas de inspección para el despósito.
8.3 Componentes
El cliente deberá mantener en sus instalaciones los

componentes de repuesto más importante, por ejemplo,
uno de cada tipo.
8.4 Almacenamiento
Laz piezas de repuesto del sistema hidráulico

deben almacenarse en local seco y en
condiciones climatológicas normales.
La humedad atmosférica deberá ser inferior al 70%.
El recinto de almacén deberá estar libre de sustancias y/o
vapores corrosivos.
edición 1 L-260 302 06-W22 Piezas de repuesto 2/2
Filtro prensa Planos y esquemas de
VPA 1530-60 datos
9. PLANOS Y ESQUEMAS DE DATOS
9.1 Planos de disposición
9.1.1 asamblea L1-060504-303
9.2 Esquemas hidráulicos
9.2.1 Esquema circular H1-060504-301
9.3 Especificaciones hidráulicas
9.3.1 Lista de piezas H4-060504-302
edición 1 L-260 302 06-W22 Planos y esquemas de datos 1/1

LISTA DE PIEZAS
Customer Project Machine

Metso Minerals AB Cerro Corona VPA 15
Drawing no Date Sign Page of Anm
H1-060504-301 2006-05-05 PS 1 of 4
Item Pcs Article no Modelcode Description Manufacturer
01 1 TA2500 2300 Liter Depósito de aceite INAB

02 1 1490150 AGI 1490 DN 150 Válvula de mariposa Sigeval
03 1 PM20 PM 20 Bomba manual OMFB

04 1 CA2516300 25CA 25/16*300/85 Cilindro CA Verken
05 1 PV032R1KFHS PV032 R1 K1T1N MMC Bomba de pistón axial Parker

06 1 A4255ALP A42/55 AL BEARB KOD P Acoplador de eje (motor) Spidex
06 1 A42A132 A42 AL BEARB 32 Acoplador de eje (bomba) Spidex

06 1 A4298SH A42 98 SH RED Anillo coronado Spidex
07 1 326TD Motor Eléctrico WEG
08 1 02-125620-DAR 45VTCS50A 2203DA 23R Bomba De Paleta Vickers

08 2 02-125626-DAR 45VTCS50A 2297DA 23R Bomba De Paleta Vickers
08 1 02-137142-DR 45V50A 11D 22R Bomba De Paleta Vickers
09 1 A7590GGWA A75/90 GG BEARB WA Acoplador de eje (motor) Spidex
09 1 A7590GGC A75/90 GG BEARB C Acoplador de eje (bomba) Spidex

09 1 A7592SH A75 92 SH VIT Anillo coronado Spidex
10 1 444/5TD Motor Eléctrico WEG
11 1 879036 DGMC 5 PT GH B 30 Válvula de descarga Vickers
12 1 86524SU HH 8650 C24 KSUB1 Filtro Pall
12x 1 96S16 HC 9600 FKS 16H Filtro elemento Pall


16 1 9F04 9F 400S Válvula de control de flujo Manatrol
17 4 M5006060 2750 63 60/ 6 BAR/MPA Galga de presión Wika
18 1 HMFB-VV10 HMFB VV 365/500 Interruptor llano Hemomatik
19 1 RAK8243728 RAK 82.4/3728M Regulador de Temperatur Sauter
20 1 PI0152MIC PI 0152 MIC Filtro de aire Mahle

21 1 1-0135 1-0135 Placa de la válvula Inab
22 DGMX2 3 PP BW B 40 Válvula de reducción de Vickers
1 870036
presión
23 1 859176 DG4V 3 6C MUB6 60 Válvula direccional Vickers
24 TE7520 Conexión del terraplén del Tema
1 TE7520
aceite
25 1 459359 DG4V 5 6C MUEK6 20 Válvula direccional Vickers
Layout drawing no Part list no

L1-060504-303 H4-060504-302
LISTA DE PIEZAS

H1-060504-301 2006-05-05 PS 2 of 4
26 1 859159 DG4V 3 2A MUB6 60 Válvula direccional Vickers

27 2 HDC680107 2103-01-18.00HD Conexión de la galga Hydac
28 1 RH4 RH4 Válvula de piloto retención Hawe


32 1 OE391KPL OE391 2000W 230/400V L=1075 Brezo del aceite Backer

33 1 M5006400 2750 63 400/40 BAR/MPA Galga de presión Wika
34 1 1-0116B 1-0116B Placa de la válvula Inab

38 1 615027 CG2V 8 BW 10 Válvula de descarga Vickers

42 1 614374 C5GV 825 UG Válvula de antirreturno Vickers
46 1 788555 DG3V H8 2C 10 Válvula direccional Vickers

50 1 PR632350 DS 302 20-350 BAR Interruptor de presión Hydrostar

52 DGMX2 3 PP FW B 40 Válvula de reducción de Vickers
1 870038
presión
53 DGMX2 3 PP FW B 40 Válvula de reducción de Vickers
1 870038
presión
55 1 9F08 9F 800 S Válvula de control de flujo Manatrol
56 1 694400 DGMPC 3 ABK BAK 41 Válvula de piloto retención Vickers
57 1 694400 DGMPC 3 ABK BAK 41 Válvula de piloto retención Vickers
58 1 694412 DGMFN 3 Y A2W B2W 41 Válvula de control de flujo Vickers

59 1 694412 DGMFN 3 Y A2W B2W 41 Válvula de control de flujo Vickers
60 1 211-0095 NFCC-LDN T13-A Válvula de aguja Sun

L1-060504-303 H4-060504-302
LISTA DE PIEZAS

H1-060504-301 2006-05-05 PS 3 of 4
60 1 SUNEQ201427 EQ201427 Placa de la válvula Sun




65 1 83870001 83 870 001 A300-Q150 Interruptor micro Crouzet

66 1 221-1212 GAT/S T-13A Placa de la válvula Sun

70 1 211-0040 CODA-XCN T-11A Válvula de piloto retención Sun

74 3 602/64M 602-64/600 Hydraulic hose Manuli
75 1 602/56M 602-56/600 Manguera hidráulica Manuli
76 1 SLANG281 2661-20/800/4525-24-20/4553-35-20 Manguera hidráulica Manuli
77 1 SLANG269 4820-12/2100/4519-20-12/2 Manguera hidráulica Manuli


83
84
85
86
87 1 796121 DT8P1 02 5 10 UB Válvula de antirreturno Vickers

L1-060504-303 H4-060504-302
LISTA DE PIEZAS

H1-060504-301 2006-05-05 PS 4 of 4


91 1 R455230240TD R455 230 240 TD adaptador Raja
92 1 R555365275TDDF350 R555 365 275 TD DF350 adaptador Raja

93 1 40112KS HH 4010 C12 KSSB1 Filtro Pall

93 1 98D25 RC 860 MZ 090 H Filter indicator Pall

98 1 M5006060 2750 63 60/ 6 BAR/MPA Galga de presión Wika
100 2 1002MK 1002MK/R 1/4"inv./M16 inv. Manguera hidráulica Manuli
HOSE TABLE SA236443-M2 LEFT MOUNTED UNIT

07 4 248009-07 4800-08/1050/4548-16-08/4519-16-08 Manguera hidráulica Manuli
4400-24/4050/4525-24/0583102400/4530- Manguera hidráulica

08 1 248009-08 Manuli
24/0586102400
6150-24/4000/6131-24-24/0586102400/6130- Manguera hidráulica
09 1 248009-09 Manuli
24-24/0586102400
10 1 248009-10 Manuli
24/0586102400
11 1 248009-11 Manuli
24/0586102400
12 1 248009-12 Manuli
24/0586102400
13 1 248009-13 Manuli
24/0586102400
14 1 248009-14 Manuli
24/0586102400
15 1 248009-08 Manuli
24/0586102400
O-ring 54.28*3.53 P90 SAE 1
16 SD21424 214 24
1/2"
16 MC6S1235 MC6S M12x35 12.9 Screw
32 MC6S1650 MC6S M16x50 12.9 Screw

L1-060504-303 H4-060504-302
PRODUCER DECLARATION
Declaration for hydraulic units that is a part of a machine,

or is to be mounted together with another machine,
to make complete machine.
Regarding to EUs directive 89/392/EEC, Annex II B

Manufacturer:
INAB Automation AB
Box 321, 891 27 Örnsköldsvik, Sweden
Box 739, 931 27 Skellefteå, Sweden
Box 857, 781 28 Borlänge, Sweden
Hydraulic unit:
Part no: 4200 Type: Powerpack for VPA15
The hydraulic unit is manufactured to be mounted in the machinery as follows:

Customer: Metso minerals AB
Plant / machine: VPA15
Project: Cerro Corona, Peru
Notice!
The hydraulic unit is not allowed to start up, until that the machinery
that
the hydraulic unit is a part of, agrees to EUs directive.
Date: 2006-05-30
Title: Projectmanager
Name: Patric Stenberg
__Patric Stenberg_____________________________________________
Sign.
CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY
CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY
This is to certify that the following component:

Description Customer
Powerpack VPA15 Metso minerals AB

Customer ref. Our ref.
L-260 302 4200

to our knowledge, has been manufacturedassembled and tested in accordance with the
drawings and standards, as well as good workmanship and skilled labour of the manufacturer
Technical info.
Powerpack for VPA15
During our handling of the component, we have not discoverd any sign of failiure.
Place Date
Borlänge,Sweden 2006-05-30
Sign
Patric Stenberg
INAB Automation AB AB INAB Automation AB AB INAB Automation AB AB a

Box 321 Box 739 Box 857
891 27 Örnsköldsvik 931 27 Skellefteå 781 28 Borlänge
Sweden Sweden Sweden
Filtro prensa Apéndices
VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES
10.1 Aceite hidráulico

Recomendación
10.2 Bombas
Bomba de émbolos axiales, pos. 07 PV 032 R1 K 1T1 N MMC
Bomba cuádruple, pos. 08 45VTCS50A 2203DA 23R
Bomba cuádruple, pos. 08 45V50A 11D 22R
10.3 Válvulas de presión

Válvula de seguridad, pos. 11 DGMC-5-PT-GH--B-30
Válvula de seguridad, pos. 38-41 CG2V-8BW-10
Válvula reductora de presión, pos. 22, 52 and 53 DGMX2-3-PP-*W-B-40
10.4. Válvula de retención

Válvula de retención, pos. 42-45 C5GV-825-UG
Válvula de retención, pos. 87-90 DT8P1-02-5-10UB
Válvula piloto de retención, pos. 28-31 RH4
Válvula piloto de retención, pos. 56 and 57 DGMPC-3-ABK-BAK-41
10.5 Válvulas de control direccional

Válvula de control direccional, pos. 23, 26, 54, 64 DG4V-3-**-MU-B6-60
Válvula de control direccional, pos. 25 DG4V 5 6C MU EK6 20
Válvula de control direccional, pos. 46-49 DG3V-H8-2C-10
10.6 Válvulas de control de caudal

Válvula de retención de aguja, pos. 16 and 55 9F-800-S
Válvula de aguja, pos. 60-63, 66-69 NFCC-LDN T13-A
Válvula piloto de retención, pos. 70-73 CODA-XCN T-11A
Válvula de retención de aguja, pos. 58 and 59 DGMFN-3Y-A2W-B2W-41
edición 1 L-260 302 06-W24 Apéndices 1/2

VPA 1530-60
10.7 Presostato
Presostato, pos. 50 DS 302 -20-350
10.8 Filtros
Filtro de aire, pos. 20 PI-0152 MIC
Filtro de baja presión, pos. 12-15 HH8650-C24-KS-UB1
Filtro de alta presión, pos. 93 HH 4010 C12 KSSB1
10.9 El controlar
Interruptor de nivel, pos. 18 HMFB-VV-V1-365-V2 500
Controlador de temperatura, pos. 19 RAK82.4/3728T
Manómetros, pos. 17, 33 and 51 2750-63-**
Conexión de manómetro, pos. 27 2103-01-**.00HD
10.10 Otros
Válvula de mariposa, pos. 2 AGI-1490 DN150
Interruptor micro, pos. 65 83 870 001 A300-Q150
Bomba manual, pos. 3 PM 20
El. motor, pos. 7 326TD
El. motor, pos. 10 444/5TD
Cilindro hidráulico, pos. 4 25CA 25/16 * 300/85
Acoplamiento de eje, pos. 6 A42/55.P-32
Acoplamiento de eje, pos. 9 A75/90.WA-C
Brezo del aceite, pos. 32 OE391 2000W 230/480V

VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES
10.1 Aceite hidráulico

Recomendación

Eaton ® No. 3-401
April 1999
Hydraulic Fluid Recommendations
Technical Data
Introduction Fluid Maintenance
The ability of Eaton hydraulic components to provide the desired Maintaining correct fluid viscosity and cleanliness level is essential
performance and life expectancy depends largely on the fluid for all hydraulic systems. Since Eaton hydraulic components are
used. The purpose of this document is to provide readers with the used in a wide variety of applications it is impossible for Eaton to
knowledge required to select the appropriate fluids for use in publish a fluid maintenance schedule that would cover every
systems that employ Eaton hydraulic components. situation. Field testing and monitoring are the only ways to get
accurate measurements of system cleanliness. OEM’s and
One of the most important characteristic to consider when distributors who use Eaton hydraulic components should test
choosing a fluid to be used in a hydraulic system is viscosity. and establish fluid maintenance schedules for their products.
Viscosity choice is always a compromise; the fluid must be thin These maintenance schedules should be designed to meet the
enough to flow easily but thick enough to seal and maintain a viscosity and cleanliness requirements laid out in this document.
lubricating film between bearing and sealing surfaces. Viscosity
requirements for each of Eaton’s product lines are given on the Fluid Selection
back of this document. Premium grade petroleum based hydraulic fluids will provide the
best performance in Eaton hydraulic components. These fluids
Viscosity and Temperature typically contain additives that are beneficial to hydraulic systems.
Fluid temperature affects viscosity. In general, as the fluid warms Eaton recommends fluids that contain anti-wear agents, rust
it gets thinner and its viscosity decreases. The opposite is true inhibitors, anti-foaming agents, and oxidation inhibitors. Premium
when fluid cools. When choosing a fluid, it is important to grade petroleum based hydraulic fluids carry an ISO VG rating.
consider the start-up and operating temperatures of the hydraulic
system. Generally, the fluid is thick when the hydraulic system is SAE grade crankcase oils may be used in systems that employ
started. With movement, the fluid warms to a point where a Eaton hydraulic components, but it should be noted that these
cooling system begins to operate. From then on, the fluid is oils may not contain all of the recommended additives. This
maintained at the temperature for which the hydraulic system means using crankcase oils may increase fluid maintenance
was designed. In actual applications this sequence varies; requirements.
hydraulic systems are used in many environments from very cold
to very hot. Cooling systems also vary from very elaborate to very Hydraulic fluids that contain V.I. (viscosity index) improvers,
simple, so ambient temperature may affect operating temperature. sometimes called multi-viscosity oils, may be used in systems
Equipment manufacturers who use Eaton hydraulic components that employ Eaton hydraulic components. These V.I. improved
in their products should anticipate temperature in their designs fluids are known to “shear-down” with use. This means that their
and make the appropriate fluid recommendations to their actual viscosity drops below the rated value. Fluid maintenance
customers. must be increased if V.I. improved fluids are used. Automotive
automatic transmission fluids contain V.I. improvers.
Cleanliness
Cleanliness of the fluid in a hydraulic system is extremely Synthetic fluids may be used in Eaton hydraulic components. A
important. Eaton recommends that the fluid used in its hydraulic reputable fluid supplier can provide information on synthetic
components be maintained at ISO Cleanliness Code 18/13 per fluids. Review applications that require the use of synthetic fluids
SAE J1165. This code allows a maximum of 2500 particles per with your Eaton representative.
milliliter greater than 5 µm and a maximum of 80 particles per
milliliter greater than 15 µm. When components with different
cleanliness requirements are used in the same system, the
cleanliest standard should be applied. OEM’s and distributors
who use Eaton hydraulic components in their products should
provide for these requirements in their designs. A reputable filter
supplier can supply filter information.
Viscosity Requirements ISO
Optimum Cleanliness
Product Line Minimum Range Maximum Requirements Comments
Heavy Duty Piston 60 SUS 80 - 180 SUS 10,000 SUS 18/13
Pumps and Motors [10 cSt] [16 - 39 cSt] [2158 cSt]
Medium Duty Piston 45 SUS 60 - 180 SUS 10,000 SUS
Pumps and Motors [6 cSt] [10 - 39 cSt] [2158 cSt] 18/13
Charged Systems
Medium Duty Piston 45 SUS 60 - 180 SUS 2,000 SUS
Pumps and Motors [6 cSt] [10 - 39 cSt] [432 cSt] 18/13
Non-charged Systems
Light Duty Transaxles, 60 SUS 80 - 180 SUS 10,000 SUS Automotive multi-viscosity oils
Transmissions, Pumps [10 cSt] [16 - 39 cSt] [2158 cSt] 18/13 and ATF are not recommended
and Series 1150 Transaxles
Series 2030 70 SUS 100 - 200 SUS 10,000 SUS 18/13 Automotive multi-viscosity oils
Motor Axles [13 cSt] [20 - 43 cSt] [2158 cSt] and ATF are not recommended
Char-Lynn J, R, and 70 SUS 100 - 200 SUS 10,000 SUS
S Series Motors, and [13 cSt] [20 - 43 cSt] [2158 cSt] 18/13
Disc Valve Motors
Char-Lynn A Series 100 SUS 100 - 200 SUS 10,000 SUS 18/13
and H Series Motors [20 cSt] [20 - 43 cSt] [2158 cSt]
Char-Lynn Steering 55 SUS 100 - 200 SUS 10,000 SUS When emergency manual steering
Control Units, Priority [9 cSt] [20 - 43 cSt] [2158 cSt] 18/13 is required, maximum viscosity
and Control Valves is 2,000 SUS [450 cSt]
Gear Pumps and 45 SUS 60 - 200 SUS 10,000 SUS 18/13
Motors, and Cylinders [6 cSt] [10 - 43 cSt] [2158 cSt]
Additional Notes:
• Fluids too thick to flow in cold weather start-ups will cause • If the natural color of the fluid has become black it is
pump cavitation and possible damage. Motor cavitation is not possible that an overheating problem exists.
a problem during cold start-ups, except for two speed motors.
Thick oil can cause high case pressures which in turn can • If the fluid becomes milky, water contamination may be a
blow motor shaft seals. problem.
• When choosing a hydraulic fluid, all the components in the • Take fluid level reading when the system is cold.
system must be considered and the optimum viscosity range
adjusted accordingly. For example, when a medium duty • Contact your Eaton representative if you have specific ques-
piston pump is combined with a Geroler motor the optimum tions about the fluid requirements of Eaton hydraulic compo-
viscosity range becomes 100 - 150 SUS [20 - 32 cSt] and nents.
viscosity should never fall below 70 SUS [13 cSt].
Eaton Corporation Eaton Ltd. Eaton B.V. Sumitomo Eaton Hydraulic Co.
Hydraulics Division Hydraulics Division Boeing Avenue 11 8 Temasek Blvd.
15151 Hwy. 5 Glenrothes, Fife 1119 PC Schiphol-Rijk 42-01 Suntec Tower Three
Eden Prairie, MN 55344 Scotland, KY7 4NW The Netherlands Singapore 03988
Telephone: 612/937-7254 Telephone: [+44] (0)1592-771-771 Telephone: [+31] (0)20-655 6776 Telephone: [+65] 832-7727 ACCREDITED BY
THE DUTCH COUNCIL
Fax: 612/937-7130 Fax: [+44] (0)1592-773-184 Fax: [+31] (0)20-655 6800 Fax: [+65] 832-7733 FOR CERTIFICATION
Reg. No. 24
ISO-9001 CERTIFICATED FIRM

Sumitomo Eaton Eaton Ltd. Eaton Hydraulics (Shanghai) Co. Ltd. Jining Eaton Hydraulic Co. Ltd. DET NORSKE VERITAS INDUSTRY BV, THE NETHERLANDS
Hydraulic Company Ltd. 7th Floor, Woo Duk Building 388 Aidu Road, Waigaogiao FTZ 6 Ji Da Road
Qualitiy System Certified
Ooi-Cho Kameoka-Shi 832-2 Yeoksam-Dong, Kangnam-Ku Pudong New Area Jining City Products in this catalog are manufactured
621-0017 Kyoto Soeul 135-750 Shanghai 200137 Shandong Province 272131 in an ISO-9001-certified site.
Japan Korea Peoples Republic of China Peoples Republic of China
Telephone: [+81] 771-22-9601 Telephone: [+82] 2-557-0595 Telephone: [+86] 21-5046 0758 Telephone: [+86] 537-2221288
Fax: [+81] 771-29-2020 Fax: [+82] 2-557-1634 Fax: [+86] 21-5046 0767 Fax: [+86] 537-2221557
www.eatonhydraulics.com
Copyright Eaton Corporation, 1978, 1993, 1996 and 1999
All Rights Reserved
Form No. 3-401 Printed in USA
General / Power Transmission Hydraulic Fluids
General
The hydraulic fluid is an important component of any - higher pressure losses in pipes and components,
operating hydraulic systems. The fluid covers several - reduction of hydraulic-mechanic efficiency,
tasks:
- more pressure drop in suction line, filling losses,
· power transmission, cavitation,
- sealing and lubrication gaps are not getting fully filled,
· wear protection resp. wear reduction,
loss of lubrication.
· heat transfer.
A too low viscosity leads to the following problems:
The importance of the fluid may be seen in the following
statement: statistical data indicate, that more than 80% of - higher leakage across all sealing gaps in the pump
all failures of hydraulic components are causal related to and in valves,
an improper condition of the hydraulic fluid. - thinner lubrication film causes more direct metal to
The selection and the maintenance / control of the fluid metal contact and more wear in glide and roller
for a hydraulic system is of major importance. The main bearings.
criteria for this selection are given in the following.
Power transmission For these reasons the selection of the right viscosity and
An important index for the power transmission behaviour the best viskositys-temperature-index needs highest
of a hydraulic fluid is the bulk module E, measured in bar. attention. Some of the selection criteria are:
It describes, how much the volume of a fluid content is
reduced under pressure. - function principle of hydraulic pumps and motors
used in the system,
A „hard“ hydraulic fluid (high bulk module) transmits - nominal pressure, nominal temperatur (and range),
pressures very fast and leads to a stiff hydraulic system.
- environmantal temperature (and range),
This is appreciated in closed loop controlled systems.
„Stiff“ systems are achieved by small pressurized volumes, - length of piping.
hard surrounding walls (pipes instead of flexible hoses)
and high viscose fluids. Beside that pressure increases The following limits are to be considered:
the bulk module of mineral oil.
- optimum working viscosity regarding efficiency,
A „soft“ hydraulic system is more subject to instability, but economy and safety
it is in general quieter, because high frequent pressure n opt = 20 – 40 mm 2/s
ripple is damped better.
- working viscosity for full operability
An important influence is also coming from the air content n operation = 16 - 100 mm 2/s
of the fluid. Mineral oil contains under atmospheric
- viscosity limits for reduced operating conditions
pressure some 9% air in solution. If caused by under
(speed of rotation, pressure, load cycle)
pressure in a hydraulic circuit (pump inlet, high fluid
velocity in orifices or by turbulences due to high return line n limit = 12 - 300 mm 2/s
speed into the reservoir) a part of this air occurs as - lowest viscosity limit, start of the damaging metal to
bubbles, the systems stiffness is drastically reduced and matal contact, only for short time and max. 50%
that can cause several problems. nominal pressure
A high influence on the dynamic power transmission is n min = 8 mm 2/s
coming from the viscosity of the hydraulic fluid. A high - highest start up viscosity, suction limit of pumps, only
viscosity, that means a „thick“ fluid, leads to a worse for short time when suction line is short and straight
fluidity and that means: n Start = 800 mm 2/s
- the recommended temperature range (fluid
temperature) for the operation of a hydraulic system
is between 30°C and 70°C, - 30°C as the lowest and
+ 90°C as the highest limit never should be exceeded
(depending on a fluid capable of these temperatures.
Mineral oil is offered in different viscosity classes (VG,
viscosity grade). The characteristic number describes
the nominal viscosity in mm 2/s ati 40°C:
Hydraulic Fluids.p65 FWW
Hydraulics 12-9
power transmission Hydraulic Fluids
VG 22 arktic conditions,
extremely long pipes;
VG 32 winterlye conditions;
VG 46 normal conditions, closed buildings;
VG 68 tropical conditions.
The correlation between viscosity and temperature usually

is described in the double logarithmic Ubbelohde dia-
gram:
Viscosity-temperature-diagram for mineral oil
Hydraulics 12-10
Wear protection, wear reduction Hydraulic Fluids
Wear protection resp. wear reduction

In hydraulic components there are many gliding contacts the lower the wear of the hydraulic components will be.
partly under high (side) loads. Beside the correct viscosity, And wear is by nearly 90% the root cause for failure of
which on one hand is responsible for the required supply hydraulic pumps and motors.
of lubricating fluid to the gap, on the other hand assures
To ensure a disruption free operation of a general hydraulic
a stable lubricating film, the wear reduction capability of
system, at least a fluid quality (cleanliness level) of 19/15
the hydraulic fluid is of major importance.
according to ISO 4406 is required. The characteristic
The describing parameter, the „Schadenskraftstufe“ (load values indicate, how many particles in the size range > 5
carrying capability), is determined in the FZG-normal test µm (1. value) and > 15 µm (2. value) are present in one
A/8,3/90 according to DIN 51 354 part 2 (gear transmission ml of a fluid. The value 19 stands for 2.500 – 5.000
test rig, 12 defined load steps at 90°Cstart temperature particles per ml, the 15 stands for 160 – 320 particles per
and 8,3 m/s circumferance speed). ml.
Depending on the nominal working pressure the following That illustrates, that a hydraulic fluid of the cleanliness
„Schadenskraftsufe“ is recommended: level 19/15 still a huge number of particles is distributed
in the fluid content. That also indicates, that this fluid
nominal pressure [bar] Schadenskraftstufe quality only for general and low pressure applications is
80 – 125 ³5 good enough.
125 – 200 5–6 When the requirements in functional safety and

operational life are higher or at high pressure applications
200 – 250 7–9 Parker recommends a cleanliness level 16/13 acc. ISO
250 – 320 ³ 10 4406. The fluid then is allowed to contain 320 - 640
particles > 5µm and 40 – 80 particles > 15 µm per ml.
> 320 ³ 12
Such a cleanliness level can be achieved with main
stream or bypass filters having a b-value of b10 ³ 75. This
Max pressure limit: 1,25 x nominal pressure value means, that, when flowing through the filter, 1/75 of
Mineral oils are offered according to DIN 51 524 in all particles > 10 µm in the fluid pass the filter element.
different fluid types: This review shows:
- HL-fluids according to DIN 51 524 part 2, normal · A reservoir filling of 100 l contains billions of
working load conditions, „Schadenskraftstufe“ 6 – contamination particles.
10; · Even a „10µ-filter“ will let pass millions of particles
- HLP-fluids according to DIN 51 524 part 3, higher > 10 µm.
working load conditions, „Schadenskraftsstufe“ > 10.
On top of that it needs to be considered:
Modern HLP-fluids today usually come with a „Schadens-
kraftstufe“ >12. They are equipped with wear prohibiting · across a breather and through the piston rod seal
additives, which ensure a high safety of operation even and wiper of a hydraulic cylinder particles can enter
under severe working conditions. a hydraulic system,
· wear on pumps, motors and valves adds more
But a fluid can maintain its wear prohibiting capabilities particles to the fluid,
only, when it is not conaminated with hard and aggressive
· mineral oil delivered in barrels typically has a
particles. Therefor in the interest of a long functional life
cleanliness level of 20/16 according to ISO 4406 or
of all components the filtration of the hydraulic fluid
worse.
need special attention.
Therefore it is very important, to pay highest attention
The sealing and gliding gaps in hydraulic components
also to the systems filtration in respect of its layout, its
typically are in the range of 3-10 µm. That means they are
supervision and its maintenance.
in the same size range as most of the particles found in
a hydraulic fluid. Since several years cleanliness levels according to ISO
The smaller the number of particles in a hydraulic fluid,
Hydraulics 12-11
Heat dissipation / special fluids Hydraulic Fluids
4406 can be described in three characteristical numbers, A final comment to seals. A good hydraulic system
e. g.: 18/ 16/ 13. the first number stands for the particles should not show, that it operates with a fluid! There should
>2µm, the two following as before for >5 und >15µm. be no leakage at all. In general hydraulic components are
leakfree. More than 90% of all problems occur at interfaces:
The load to the fluid in hydraulic systems leads to its
Aging. Therefore the fluid needs to be checked for its · ports,
pefect condition. This check should be performed at least · flange interfaces of valves,
twice a year and include as a minimum requirement the
determination of neutralization number, viscosity, colour · connectors.
index and cleanliness level. The assembly of the system is the main cause for
The operational life of the fluid depends very much on the problems in this area.
operating pressure, the operating temperature, the Nevertheless the system: hydraulic fluid & elastomeric
circulation number (delivery of all pumps divided by the seal extremely sensitive. Temperature, chemical
reservoir content) and the type of the fluid. General incompatibility and mechanical damages are the most
statements to the average time of usage therefore are frequent causes for a failöure of this system. Please
impossible. contact Parker if you have any question to this topic.
Heat dissipation Parker does not give an explicit recommendation for a
The temperature has an important influence on the certain fluid product, fluid brand or fluid manufacturer.
properties of the hydraulic fluid. The viscosity, the lubricity, The permanent research and development in the field of
the aging and other significant features are direct or hydraulic fluids and seal materials makes it impossible to
indirect depending on the temperature. That indicates, test all possible combinations for compatibility with our
that the thermal balance of a hydraulic system needs to components. The recommendations made here and the
be considered during the layout and design. On one hand discussion of possible restrictions, relevant standards
the fluid is stressed by a high temperature, on the other and other useful literature should help to select the right
hand the fluid is the media to transport the heat away from fluid for a hydraulic system and to design the power unit
resistors, orifices and other throttling devices and friction in a way that it is able to fulfill all requirements.
zones. Therefor during layout it has to be made sure, that
nowhere in the system a local overheating by dissipated
heat can occur. That could destroy seals, lead to a failure
of components due to lack of lubricity or finally lead to a
destruction of the fluid itself.
Hydraulics 12-12
Special fluids Hydraulic Fluids
Special fluids for environment protection

All statements made above are in principle also valid for Note: even bio-degradable fluids need to be
these fluids. Regarding the selection /definition of the disposed according to special disposing rules
required viscosity level, the cleanliness level and the (like mineral oil).
lubrication and wear protection behaviour all criteria Prior to the use of these fluids we recommend to
discussed in the mineral oil section have to be applied contact our specialists.
accordingly.
The following special fluid features and conditions are to
be considered:
· Fluids according to DIN 51 502
(HF-Fluids)
· Fluids basing on natural ingredients
- good lubricaction, viscosity-temperature characte-
These fluids are fire resistant. The following classes
ristic better than standard mineral oil.
are used:
- density slightly higher than mineral oil, therefore
check for good suction conditions! HFA oil in water emulsion: 95 – 98% water;
- pourpoint approx. – 30°, therefore not suitable for low
HFB water in oil emulsion: >40% water;
temperature operation.
- accelerated aging. First fluid change after 500 h, HFC water containing solutions: 35 – 55% water;
second change after another 1,000 h. Then all 2,000 (poly-glycole)
h or annually, if less than 2,000 h annual operation.
HFD water free fluids
- high affinity to water. The ingression of water has to (mainly phosphor acid ester).
be avoided under all conditions. At temperature above
50°C destroys the fluid if water is present.
- can be mixed with mineral oil(under loss of biological
degradability!)
- internal coating of reservoirs etc. to be compatible
with the fluid. Check with fluid supplier. The operation of Parker hydraulic components with HFD
fluids within the limits of the fluid suppliers specification
· Fluids basing on esters (synthetical esters)
(temperature range, filtration, seal material compatibility)
- The same remarks as for the natural based fluids are and the viscosity limits of our components is possible
valid. without restrictions.
· Fluids basing on polyglycol (not HFC/water glycol)
The operation with HFC involves certain restrictions
- good lubricaction, viscosity-temperature characte- regarding pressure limitation and bearing life reduction in
ristic better than standard mineral oil. rotating units. Please contact our specialists.
- aging/durability according to actual knowledge similar Parker does not give a general release for the operation
to mineral oil. with HFA and HFB fluids. In certain cases a special
- pourpoint approx. – 40°C, be careful at low approval can be given upon request.
temperatures!
If you are not sure, wether our products can be
- density significantly higher than for mineral oil. used with a special fluid or not, please call us. Our
Therefore the max. input speeds for self priming specialists are glad to answer your questions and
pumps are to be reduced by 20%. to give you any necessary support.
- use fluorcarbon as seal material. Our hydraulic
components are tested with mineral oil; they need to
be completely made empty befor installation!
- normal paints and coatings are destroyed. Please
contact fluid supplier!
- Never mix with mineral oil, solid sediments are go-
ing to develop and will block filters, orifices etc.!
Hydraulics 12-13
VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES
10.2 Bombas

VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES
10.2 Bombas

Bulletin HY11-PVI016/GB
Installation and setup

manual
PV series
Design series ³ 40, PVplus
Variable displacement
axial piston pump
Parker Hannifin GmbH

Hydraulic Controls Division
Gutenbergstr. 38
41564 Kaarst, Germany
Tel.: (+49) 2131-513-0
Fax: (+49) 2131-513-230
www.parker.com
Copyright Ó 2000 by Parker Hannifin GmbH

Axial Piston Pump
Installation Manual Series PV
1. Installation and start-up The suction pipe must have access to clean, cooled
For a safe and disruption free operation of any ma- and filtered fluid, free of air bubbles. No turbulences
chine or system a careful installation and start up or high flow velocities should occur at the tube inlet.
following the manufacturers instruction is mandato- Therefore position inlet as far as possible away from
ry. return line and drain line. Make sure that the fluid
Hydraulic systems can be designed for many totally circulation in the reservoir does keep return flow from
different functions and they require consequently suction pipe inlet. In case of positive head use shut
different start up procedures. The hydraulic pump is off valve in the inlet, monitored with proximity switch
in this respect only one, but nevertheless very im- or equivalent to avoid start up of motor when valve
portant component of the whole system. is closed. When installed into the reservoir use short
A general start up instruction therefore can give many suction pipe with pipe end cut under 45°.
helpful hints but it needs to be completed by specific
additions depending of the individual nature of the Pressure port
system or power unit. Select correct pressure rating for pipe, hose and
During installation and start up the following steps connectors. Take pressure peaks into account. Di-
need to be carried out carefully: mension the piping according to the port size. Pre-
Visual inspection vent excitation of the system by using flexible port
connections.
Make sure that all components of the shipment are
complete, free of any damage, free of outside con- Drain port
tamination and properly protected against ingression Always use highest possible drain port of the pump.
of contamination. Drain port must be higher than pump centerline or
Cleanliness install additional air bleed line. Never combine pump
drain line with other return lines and/or drain lines.
Contamination of any kind is the enemy of any hy-
Pump shall not be able to run empty. Max. allowable
draulic component. It is still the number 1 cause for
case pressure £0.5 bar (2 bar peak), also during
component failure. Therefor maximum care and
compensation.
cleanliness are required during all handling and
managing of parts that come in contact with the hy- Use low pressure pipe/hose, as short as possible
draulic fluid. All ports of the pumps and other com- and full cross section according to port dimension.
ponents must be covered until pipes or hoses are Do not use elbows or sharp corners. When drain
mounted to them. Perform assembly preferably in a port is on the side of the pump drain line should have
dry and dust free room. Use only suitable tools. bridge higher than pump top (also when installed in
reservoir). Drain pipe must end at least 200 mm be-
Installation
low fluid level even at lowest filling level. Never let
Installation horizontal or vertical, avoid rigid connec-
drain flow go direct into suction area of reservoir (tem-
tion from pump to reservoir cover or frame and to
perature, air bubbles). Max. length 2m, otherwise
inlet and outlet piping to prevent excitation of the
use larger pipe diameter than port size.
whole system due to pump vibrations.
Note: During operation of PV pumps of all sizes un-
Suction port
der the following conditions:
Position to the side or to the bottom, max. fluid ve-
Q ~ Qmax
locity approx. v = 0.5 m/sec, cut suction pipe inlet
pinlet < 2 bar absolute
under 45°. Minimum distance from bottom 2 - 3 times
diameter and, even at lowest fluid level, approx. 200 Poutlet < 25 bar
mm below fluid level. Inlet pressure, even during (e. g. low pressure circulation) the drain flow can
compensation, never should drop below 0.8 bar (ab- change direction. Fluid is taken from the case into
solute). the piston mainly through the decompression orifice
Absolute gas tight connection (risk of cavitation, and across the slipper. There is a danger that the
noise). Air bubbles due to vacuum in the inlet can pump case runs dry, the pump overheats and the
destroy pumps within a short time due to cavitation bearings lack of lubrication when the fluid is removed
erosion. Suction pipe should be as short as possi- from the pump case.
ble. Use only clean, low pressure pipe, avoid sharp Therefore the drain pipe must be able to take fluid
elbows and any restriction of cross section. from the reservoir. That means: The drain line must
PVplus UK 18.10.00.PM6.5
end below fluid level, and a check valve in the drain

Hydraulics 3
Axial Piston Pump
Port positions for PV (shown for clockwise rotation, for ccw rotation ports are mirrored)
Alternative drain port Drain port
Interface for
compensator
Suction port
(inlet) Gage port
Flushing port,
covered Pressure port
below pump (outlet)
line is not permissible. If it has to be installed for flushing of the pump case, to avoid high fluid tem-
whatever reason the case needs to be flushed with peratures.
a flow of 10 - 15% of the nominal pump flow. A flushing flow of 5 - 10% of nominal flow should
Flushing port be enough.
The PV pumps of design series 40 (PVplus) are
Drive input
equipped with a flushing port. This port is smaller
in diameter than the drain port(s) and is located For direct drive use elastic coupling free of axial
opposite to these ports in the bottom of the pump and radial reaction forces. Please follow strictly
case. The flushing flow can - depending on the the instructions of the coupling supplier regarding
actual working conditions - be used to keep the axial clearance, axial displacement and angular
pump case filled, to warm up the pump (during tolerances. Couplings never shall be mounted
cold temperature operation) or for a better heat using a hammer. Threads in the shaft end allow
dissipation. Permanent dead head operation ( >15 smooth mounting of the coupling.
min) either for pumps of frame size 3 and larger The drive shaft should only carry true torque. Con-
(PV063 and higher) or at high input speeds above tact Parker for allowable side loads or axial forces.
1,800 rpm as well as high environmetntal tempera- PV pumps are normally for one direction of rota-
tures flushing are recommended. Also dead head tion only. Therefore check rotation of drive motor
operation with HFC fluids (water glycole) requires prior to installation.
4 Parker Hannifin GmbH

Hydraulics Hydraulic Controls Division
Axial Piston Pump
Electrical interface to ISO 4572.
Check voltage, current, phase and connection prop- Cleanliness level for systems with higher re-
erties. Verify direction of motor rotation. quirements for operational life and functional safety
Fluid reservoir should be 16/13 according to ISO 4406; correspond-
The reservoir needs to meet all system requirements ing filter rating x = 10 mm ( b10³75 ) according to
concerning design, size, location and porting. Be- ISO 4572.
side beeing reservoir for the hydraulic fluid, the tank Use filter with indicator or electrical signal when
also supports heat dissipation, air removal, water capacity limit is approached.
removal and contamination sedimentation. Often the Suction filter should be avoided. Suction conditions
reservoir also is the fundament for the motor pump will be affected. Filter can be blocked and cause
unit. In this case the separation of pump and remain- cavitation and severe pump damage. When used,
ing structure by elastic means is mandatory to avoid a vacuum sensor with shut off function is manda-
noise and vibration being induced into the frame tory.
work. The reservoir needs to be carefully sealed Properly dimensioned breather rating £10 mm
against ingression of contamination and water. A level should be used. Observe min. and max. fluid level;
indicator and thermometer should be placed in an consider exchange volume with cylinders in the
easily accessible location. system.
Fluid content (general rule): stationary systems 3 to Filling of pump case
4 times pump nominal flow, 1 times or even smaller Pump case must be filled via the drain port, to
in mobile systems. ensure lubrication, sealing and smooth start up.
Filling of the system
Start up
Use only high quality mineral oil based fluids, like
Check if all ports are properly connected according
HLP oils according to DIN 51524 part 2. For other
to the specification, all connectors are tightened and
fluids (HFC, HFD, bio degradable or synthetic flu-
all adjustments are made.
ids) please contact Parker and review the Hydraulic
Fluids Information in Catalogue 2500/UK. Open suction valve!
Operation viscosity should be 16 to 100 mm²/s, op- Switch system to free circulation or to lowest pres-
timum viscosity range is in the 20 to 40 mm²/s, max. sure. Allow air bleeding for quick priming. Start pump
viscosity for short time up to 320 mm²/s. in tip mode operation until pump and all pipes are
Because of the possibly uncompatible ingredients filled and free from air bubbles.
fluids should not be mixed (separation of fluid, re- If pump does not build up pressure double check
duction or loss of fluid properties). the installation.
Pay highest attention on cleanliness! Raise pressure setting only when all air is removed.
Fill system only via a filtration device. Use filtration Let the pump work at reduced pressure for 5 - 10
unit, when basic contamination of the refill fluid ex- min, check if all pipes and connections are leak free
ceeds class 10 according NAS 1638 (contamination and tight.
level 19/16 according to ISO 4406). Hydraulic fluid Observe reservoir: fluid level, built up of foam, fluid
supplied in barrels typically exceeds these con- temperature. When system is warmed up first func-
tamination levels. tional tests can be performed.
Filtration
Filtration is the most important factor to the opera- Note
tional life of the hydraulic system. Statistical analy- All pumps are tested and adjusted after assembly
ses indicate, that contamination is by far the most in our factory.
important reason for system or component failure. If no specific pre-setting is required on the order
Use return line, pressure and/or bypass filtration. only the compensating pressure needs to be ad-
Bypass filtration usually is most efficient. For gen- justed. Depending on the compensator option this
eral purpose hydraulic systems with limited require- might be done on a pilot valve only. In this case no
ments for operational life contamination level 19/15 adjustments on the compensator or the pump is
according to ISO 4406 should be desired; corre- required. Only after service or repair a basic ad-
sponding filter rating: x = 25 mm ( b25³75 ) according justment needs to be performed.

Hydraulics 5
Axial Piston Pump
2. Displacement adjustment
Displacement change
Displacement change
Minimum adjustable
All axial piston pumps of the PV series are equipped
with an adjustable displacement limiter.
(approx. cm³/U)
(approx. cm³/U)
(approx. cm³/U)
displacement
The servo piston stroke is limited at full displace-
ment by a screw, guided in the end cover plug of
per turn
per mm
the servo piston bore. The screw is protected against
unintentional adjustment by a self-sealing lock nut.
Size
The factory setting of the displacement is accord-
ing to the nominal displacement of the pump. An PV016 1.5 1.5 5
adjustment may only be made to a lower displace- PV020 1.5 1.5 8
ment (turning screw in). An adjustment to a higher PV023 1.5 1.5 12
than the nominal displacement can destroy the PV032 2.2 2.2 17
pump. PV040 2.2 2.2 25
Adjustment should only be made with the pump PV046 2.2 2.2 30
working at full displacement (not compensated) and
PV063 3.4 3.4 35
at a low output. At full displacement the piston area
PV080 3.4 3.4 50
of the servo piston is under case pressure. Open-
ing the self-sealing nut will only cause a negligible PV092 3.4 3.4 65
leakage under these conditions. PV140 5.6 8.4 20
PV180 5.6 8.4 60
PV270 6.8 10.2 120
Adjustment screw
Lock nut 3. Standard pressure compensator, code ...F*S
The adjustment of the compensating pressure is
performed for the standard pressure compensa-
tor directly at the compensator.
To adjust the pressure, the lock nut (SW 19) is to
be loosened and the adjustment spindle is to be
turned. Turning clockwise will increase the com-
pensating pressure, turning counter-clockwise will
decrease the compensating pressure. The
adjustment spindle has a thread pitch of 1mm
(thread M 12 x 1).
The following limits exist for the three spring
options:
Minimum pressure
Pressure variation
Nominal pressure
per turn / per mm
Note! Maximum
Pressure range
adjustment
possible
setting
D 140bar 8 - 10 bar 20 bar 170 bar

Turning the adjustment screw clockwise will reduce
the pumps displacement. For the sizes PV016 H 210 bar 8 - 10 bar 40 bar 350 bar
PV092 the thread pitch is 1mm, for sizes PV140
W 350 bar 8 - 10 bar 60 bar 450 bar
PV270 the thread pitch is 1.5 mm. The following
table shows the displacement change per mm resp. Note! Danger of spring overload at maximum
per turn and the minimum adjustable displacement: possible adjustment pressure!

Axial Piston Pump
Snap ring
Adjustment
spindle
Lock nut
Although for all three springs the min. adjustable The max. possible pressure adjustment is reached,
pressure is approx. 8 - 10 bar (min. compensating when the spindle is completely turned in (snap ring
pressure of a PV pump), for the spring code H a touches the lock nut). In this situation there is a
min. pressure adjustment of 40 bar and for the danger of spring overload depending of manufac-
spring code W a min. pressure adjustment of 70 turing tolerances. If such a high adjustment should
bar is recommended. Adjusting lower pressures be prohibited, washers can be placed between lock
with these springs can lead to an extremely slow nut and snap ring.
compensator response.
4. Remote pressure compensator, code ...FRC
Snap ring
Adjustment
spindle
Lock nut
Remote port
For the remote pressure compensator the pres- The pilot valve can be mounted as far as 15 m
sure adjustment is done at a pressure pilot valve away from the pump. Please note for a distance
(not included in the shipment of the pump). The above 5 m, that low temperatures and a high fluid
pilot valve is connected to the remote port. viscosity can significantly increase the compen-
The pressure pilot valve must be capable of hand- sating pressure.
ling securely a pilot flow of approx. 1.2 l/ The pilot connection should be dimensioned to
min.Therefore a nominal flow of 3 - 6 l/min is re- avoid any considerable pressure drop in this line.
commended for the pilot valve. Selection of a pilot The pressure adjustment and the max. pressure
valve too small or too large can result in compen- setting are given by type and setting of the pilot
sator instability. valve.
The pilot port thread can be determined from the The min. compensating pressure can be calculated
ordering code of the pump (threads and port code): from the min. adjustable pressure of the pilot valve
plus the differential pressure setting at the com-
Threads and Port pensator.
port code dimensions
Factory setting for the compensator differential
1 G 1/4 BSPP pressure is 15 ±1 bar. This adjustment should only
3 7/16-20 UNF be modified, if specifically required. To change the
7 M12 x 1.5 ISO 6149-1 adjustment the lock nut is to be loosened and the
adjustment spindle to be turned. Clockwise turn-
8 M12 x 1.5 ISO 6149-1 ing will increase the differential pressure setting.

Hydraulics 7
Axial Piston Pump
13. Trouble shooting guide

Pump delivers no output flow.
Drive motor does not turn.
Reason Motor is not connected correctly or one of the three phases has failed. Motor does
not turn smoothly when pump is disconnected from pump.
Solution Check motor connections, check electrical power supply.
Reason Pump mechanically blocked. Motor turns smoothly when disconnected from pump.
Solution Send pump to factory for service.
Drive motor only turns at slow speed.
Reason Motor is not selected properly. In star circuit not enough torque.
Solution Start pump at unloaded system. Use motor with more horse power.
Reason Pump is hydraulically blocked. No function of compensator, no pressure relief valve.
Pump stops after e few turns.
Solution Check function of pump compensator (see below). Start pump at unloaded system.
Drive motor turns, pump does not turn.
Reason Coupling is not or not correctly mounted.
Solution Check coupling assembly and correct it.
Drive motor turns and pump turns.
Reason Wrong direction of rotation.
Solution Change direction of motor rotation.
Reason Fluid reservoir empty or not filled to level, suction line ends above fluid level.
Solution Fill reservoir to required level, if necessary increase suction pipe length.
Reason Suction line is blocked. E. g. by plugs, cleaning tissues, plastic-plugs. Ball valve in
the suction line closed. Suction filter blocked.
Solution Check suction line for free flow. Open valves in suction line. Valves should be equipped
with electrical indicator. Check suction filter.
Reason Suction line not gas tight, pump gets air into suction port.
Solution Seal suction line against air ingression.
Reason Pressure line / system is not able to bleed air out.
Solution Unload pressure port, unload system before start, bleed air from pressure line.
Pump does not build up pressure, but delivers full flow at low pressure.
Reason Standard pressure compensator is set to minimum pressure.
Solution Adjust compensator setting to desired pressure.
Reason Orifice in remote pressure compensator blocked.
Solution Make sure orifice Ø 0.8 mm in control spool is free and open.
Reason No pressure pilot valve connected to port PR.
Solution Install suitable pressure pilot valve and adjust it to the desired setting.
Reason Multiple pressure pilot selector valve is not energized. Pump works in stand-by.
Solution Energize selector valve solenoid.
Reason No load sensing line connected.
Solution Connect system load sensing port to compensator.
Reason Load sensing valve is closed or too small.
Solution Open load sensing valve, use larger valve size.
Reason Too much pressure drop between pump and load sensing valve.
Solution Make sure connection is wide enough and has not too much pressure drop.
Reason Differential pressure at compensator is adjusted improperly (too low).
Solution Check differential pressure adjustment and correct it as described above.

Axial Piston Pump
Reason Horse power compensator setting changed.

Solution Check setting of horse power compensator and correct it, if required.
Reason Proportional displacement control is not connected as required.
Solution Check wiring; connect according to installation manual for electronic module.
Reason Displacement transducer (LVDT) adjustement changed.
Solution Correct zero setting at displacement transducer.
Reason Electronic module has no supply power.
Solution Make sure module is powered with 22 - 36 V DC.
Reason Plug instead of orifice Ø 0.8 mm in the load sensing line to pump.
Solution Install orifice as required.
Reason Cylinder block lifts from valve plate due to excessive wear.
Solution Send pump to factory for service.
Pump does not compensate.
Reason No orifice is in load sensing line to compensator code FFC.
Solution Install orifice Ø 0.8 mm as shown in circuit diagram (page 9).
Reason No pressure pilot valve connected to compensator or valve is blocked.
Solution Connect pressure pilot valve to compensator, make sure valve opens as required.
Reason Load sensing line connected incorrectly (e. g. upstream of load sensing valve)
Solution Connect load sensing line downstream (actuator side) of load sensing valve..
Reason No or too low pressure at pump outlet port.
Solution Pump outlet pressure must be at least 15 bar, because otherwise the bias spring in
the pump cannot be compressed.
Pump does not upstroke, sticks at zero displacement.
Reason Compensator is blocked due to contamination.
Solution Clean hydraulic fluid, clean compensator valve.
Reason Cable to LVDT or proportional solenoid is interrupted.
Solution Check wiring and make sure cable is ok. Replace if necessary.
Compensator is unstable.
Reason Compenstor spool sticks, due to contamination of hydraulic fluid.
Solution Clean hydraulic system, clean compensator valve.
Reason Compensator differential pressure changed (too low or too high).
Solution Adjust compensator differential pressure to required setting.
Reason Wrong pilot orifice or pressure pilot valve improperly selected.
Solution Select pilot orifice and pressure pilot valve as recommended.
Reason Dynamic critical system, e. g.: pressure compensator combined with pressure reduc-
ing valve, load sensing (flow) compensator combined with flow control valve.
Solution Use remote pressure compensator instead of standard pressure compensator, in-
stall orifice in load sensing line remote from compensator (as close as possible to
load sensing valve).

Hydraulics 19
Gutenbergstr. 38
D 41564 Kaarst
Phone: (+49) 2131-513-0
Fax: (+49) 2131-513-230
www.parker.com
Copyright Ó 2001 by Parker Hannifin GmbH

Replacement kits, series PV, frame size 2, PV032 - PV046
Exploded view, PV frame size 2, PV032 - PV046
page 1 of 1
Ersatzteil-Sätze Serie PV, Baugröße 2
Pos. Qty Ordering code Description Remark

SK- Seal kit
PVBG2 Series PV, frame size 2, PV032 - PV046
N Seals NBR
V Seals FPM
E Seals EPDM
1 Thread: metric, ports: BSPP
3 Thread: UNC, ports: UNF
7 Thread: metric, ports: ISO 6149
8 Thread: UNC, ports: ISO 6149
includes:
4 1 body seal, frame size 2
58 1 port plug VSTI-10x1-OR-A3C ISO 6149 NBR seals NBR
58 (1) port plug VSTI-10x1-OR-A3C ISO 6149 FPM seals FPM
58 (1) port plug VSTI-10x1-OR-A3C, ISO 6149 EPDM seals EPDM
59 1 port plug M 27 x 2 ISO 6149, NBR seals NBR
59 (1) port plug M 27 x 2 ISO 6149, FPM seals FPM
59 (1) port plug M 27 x 2 ISO 6149, EPDM seals EPDM
63 2 o-ring 2-010-N552-90; 6,07 x 1,78 seals NBR
63 (2) o-ring 2-010-V747-75; 6,07 x 1,78 seals FPM
63 (2) o-ring 2-010-E540-80; 6,07 x 1,78 seals EPDM
72 1 shaft seal BABSL 0,5 35 x 52 x 6-NBR seals NBR
72 (1) shaft seal BABSL 0,5 35 x 52 x 6-FPM seals FPM
72 (1) shaft seal BABSL 0,5 35 x 52 x 6-EPDM seals EPDM
73 1 lock nut M 10 x 1, SEAL LOCK
74 3 seal ring LRG 28 x 25,2 x 0,5
75 1 back ring 8-020-N300-90; 22,68 x 1,35 seals NBR
75 (1) back ring 8-020-V709-90; 22,68 x 1,35 seals FPM
75 (1) back ring 8-020-E652-90; 22,68 x 1,35 seals EPDM
Seite 1 von 5

79 1 port plug VSTI R1/2" ED NBR NBR, threads 1
79 (1) port plug VSTI R1/2" ED FPM FPM, threads 1
79 (1) port plug VSTI R1/2" ED EPDM EPDM, threads 1
79 (1) port plug 10HP50NS-NBR, 7/8-14 UNF NBR, threads 3
79 (1) port plug 10HP50NS-FPM, 7/8-14 UNF FPM, threads 3
79 (1) port plug 10HP50NS-EPDM, 7/8-14 UNF EPDM, threads 3
79 (1) port plug VSTI-22 x 1,5-OR-A3C ISO 6149 NBR NBR, threads 7, 8
79 (1) port plug VSTI-22 x 1,5-OR-A3C ISO 6149 FPM FPM, threads 7, 8
79 (1) port plug VSTI-22 x 1,5-OR-A3C ISO 6149 EPDM EPDM, threads 7, 8
80 (1) port plug 4HP50NS-NBR, 7/16-20 UNF NBR, threads 3
80 (1) port plug 4HP50NS-FPM, 7/16-20 UNF FPM, threads 3
80 (1) port plug 4HP50NS-EPDM, 7/16-20 UNF EPDM, threads 3
80 (1) port plug VSTI-12 x 1,5-OR-A3C ISO 6149 NBR NBR, threads 7, 8
80 (1) port plug VSTI-12 x 1,5-OR-A3C ISO 6149 FPM FPM, threads 7, 8
80 (1) port plug VSTI-12 x 1,5-OR-A3C ISO 6149 EPDM EPDM, threads 7, 8
81 (1) port plug 12HP50NS-NBR, 1 1/16-12 UNF NBR, threads 3
81 (1) port plug 12HP50NS-FPM, 1 1/16-12 UNF FPM, threads 3
81 (1) port plug 12HP50NS-EPDM, 1 1/16-12 UNF EPDM, threads 3
81 (1) port plug VSTI-27 x 2-OR-A3C ISO 6149 NBR NBR, threads 7, 8
81 (1) port plug VSTI-27 x 2-OR-A3C ISO 6149 FPM FPM, threads 7, 8
81 (1) port plug VSTI-27 x 2-OR-A3C ISO 6149 EPDM EPDM, threads 7, 8
Seite 2 von 5

RK- Replacement kit
PVBG2 PV series, frame size 2, PV032 - PV046
VT Connecting bolt kit
M Metric version
S SAE/UNC version
includes:
42 4 hexagon socket head cap screw M 12 x 65 DIN 912 12.9 threads M
42 (4) hexagon socket head cap screw 1/2" - 13 UNC x 2 1/2" threads S
43 4 hexagon socket head cap screw M 5 x 12 DIN 912 12.9 threads M
43 (4) hexagon socket head cap screw Nr. 10 - 24 UNC x 1/2" threads S
48 2 locator pin 8 M6 x 16 DIN 7 St
RK- Replacement kit

GE Trunnion bearing unit
includes:
6 2 Trunnion bearing HX, frame size 2
82 2 hexagon socket countersunk head cap screw M 5 x 10 DIN 7991, coated
RK- Replacement kit

RG Rotating group
includes:
15 9 piston and slipper, crimped
16 1 cylinder block with brass sleeves
17 1 retainer spring cylinder block
20 4 distance washer
21 1 slipper retainer plate
22 2 retainer segment
39 1 snap ring for holes, 42 x 1,75 DIN 472
41 4 hexagon socket head cap screw M 6 x 20 DIN 912 12.9, coated
47 1 locator pin 5 M6 x 12 DIN 7 St
51 2 washer SS 30 x 42 x 2,5 DIN 988
RK- Replacement kit

KS Piston assembly, set
includes:
15 9 piston and slipper, crimped
RK- Replacement kit

SS Valve plate
R Rotation clockwise
L Rotation counter-clockwise
includes:
23 1 valve plate, clockwise rotation, frame size 2 rotation R
23 (1) valve plate, counterclockwise rotation, frame size 2 rotation L
Seite 3 von 5

RK- Replacement kit
WP Shaft unit, keyed
WZ Shaft unit, splined
M Metric version
S SAE/UNC version
includes:
14 1 shaft, key, metric, frame size 2 key, metric
14 (1) shaft, splined, metric, frame size 2 splined, metric
14 (1) shaft, key, SAE, frame size 2 key, SAE
14 (1) shaft, splined, SAE, frame size 2 splined, SAE
37 1 key A10 x 8 x 56 DIN 6885 St key, metric
37 (1) key 7,93 x 7,93 x 55,8 key, SAE
38 1 Sicherungsring für shaft, 35 x 1,5 DIN 471
52 2 washer SS 35 x 45 x 2,5 DIN 988
57 1 needle bearing HK - 30 x 45 x 18
62 1 roller bearing NUP - 207 - EC,
RK- Replacement kit

HE Adjustable displacement limiter
N Seals NBR
V Seals FPM
E Seals EPDM
includes:
28 1 cover M 48 x 2
29 1 adjustment screw M 10 x 1
73 1 lock nut M 10 x 1, SEAL LOCK
RK- Replacement kit

SB Servo piston sleeve
N Seals NBR
V Seals FPM
E Seals EPDM
includes:
26 1 servo piston sleeve, frame size 2
Seite 4 von 5

RK- Replacement kit
PV032 PV series, frame size 2, PV032
SK Servo piston
N Seals NBR
V Seals FPM
E Seals EPDM
includes:
12 1 hexagon socket head cap screw M 10 x 75 DIN 912 12.9, coated
27 1 servo piston, frame size 2
50 4 washer SS 11 x 16 x 1,5 DIN 988
74 3 seal ring LRG 28 x 25,2 x 0,5
95 (1) distance washer BG2, VG=32 cm³ size 032
95 (1) distance washer BG2, VG=40 cm³ size 040
RK- Replacement kit

SR Swashplate kit
includes:
3 1 swashplate, finished, frame size 2
9 1 servo spring locator, frame size 2
11 1 swash plate connector, frame size 2
60 1 chain link, 548 - 11 DIN 8187
RK- Replacement kit

RF Servo spring kit
includes:
7 1 servo spring washer, frame size 2
8 1 servo spring, frame size 2
10 1 servo spring plug, frame size 2
45 1 cylinder pin 14M6 x 60 DIN 6325
32 RK- Replacement kit

PV000 PV series, alle frame sizen
EV Airbleed valve
N Seals NBR
V Seals FPM
E Seals EPDM
includes:
260 1 airbleed valve body
262 1 spring airbleed valve
263 1 ball Ø 6,35, tungston carbide, class G20
264 1 roll pin, 2 x 10 DIN 1481
Seite 5 von 5
VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES
10.2 Bombas

Service Data
Vickers®
Vane Pumps
Quiet Intra-Vane Single Pumps

25V(T)-35V(T)-45V(T) Series
20 Design 282/283 Series
Reprinted 6/1/96 I-3157-S

Table of Contents
Section Page
I. Introduction
A. Purpose of Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B. General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
II. Description
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
III. Principles of Operation

A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
IV. Installation and Operating Instructions

A. Installation Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
B. Mounting and Drive Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
C. Shaft Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
D. Piping and Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
E. Hydraulic Fluid Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
F. Sound Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
G. Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
H. Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
V. Service & Maintenance

A. Circuit Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
B. Adding Fluid to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
C. Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
D. Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
E. Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
F. Product Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
G. Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
VI. Overhaul
A. Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
B. Unit Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
C. Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
D. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
E. Inspection, Repair and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
F. Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
VII. Service and Maintenance

A. Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
B. Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2
Section I – Introduction
A. Purpose of Manual 1. Model Codes – Variations within each basic model series are
covered in the model code. Table 2 is a breakdown of the model
This manual describes the basic operating characteristics codes covering these units. The model code will be stamped
and provides service and overhaul information for Vickers into the cover nameplate. If an older design unit is being
282/283 suffix single vane pumps. Information contained updated to the new 282/283 design, stamp the new design
herein pertains to the latest design series. number on the nameplate. Inquiries should always include the
complete unit model code number as stamped on the
B. General Information 2. nameplate.
Related Publications – Service parts information and Model Parts Catalog Installation
installation dimensions are not contained in this manual. The 25V I-3158-S
installation drawings and parts catalogs listed in Table 1 are
25VT I-3154-S
available from Vickers.
35V I-3177-S
560
35VT I-3149-S
45V I-3159-S
45VT I-3151-S
Table 1. Related Publications
Model Code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1Viton seals 6 Port connections 9 Port positions (Inlet cover

Omit if not required SAE 4 – Bolt positions viewed from cover end)
A – Opposite outlet port
2 B – 90_ CW from outlet port
Pump series 7 Coupling C – Inline with outline port
25, 35, 45 2 – For SAE “A” flange 30_ involute D – 90_ CCW from outlet port
spline w/1.25 extension
2 – For SAE “B” flange 30_ involute 10
3 Quiet intra-vane type pump spline w/1.75 extension Design
2 – For SAE “C” flange 30_ involute
4
spline w/2.31 extension 11 Rotation (Viewed from shaft end)
Thru shaft connection mtg.
(SAE 2 bolt adapter flange) L – Left hand
A – “A” flange 8 Shaft type Omitted – Right hand
B – “B” flange 1 – Straight key
C – “C” flange 11 – Splined 12 Industrial suffix
86 – Straight key (heavy duty)
5 SAE rated delivery USgpm 282 – SAE 2 bolt mounting
1200 RPM at 100 PSI 283 – Foot mounted
25V 35V 45V
12 USgpm 25 USgpm 42 USgpm
21 USgpm 38 USgpm
Table 2. Model Code Breakdown
3
Section II – Description
A. General 3.
The single intra-vane pump with a 282/283 suffix is designed
to operate at reduced noise levels, but still maintain the
same reliability, operating characteristics, and service
advantages of previous models.
All sound reduction in the 282/283 series pump is

accomplished within the cartridge kit. The ring, vanes, rotor
and support plates have been redesigned. The pump
housing remains unchanged. Thus, existing systems may be
upgraded by simply replacing the cartridge kit. Figure 1
shows the basic 282/283 cartridge kit. Note that 12 vanes Figure 1. -282/-283 Basic Cartridge Kit Parts
are assembled into the machined rotor slots. Previous
designed models use 10 vanes.
Section III – Principles of Operation 4.
A. General to the small intra-vane area of the vane. As the pump vane
rotates through the high and low quadrants, outlet pressure
The operating principle of a vane pump is illustrated in is alternately applied to the rest of the under vane area. This
Figure 2. A slotted rotor is splined to the drive shaft and varying pressure under the vane reduces wear and
turns inside a cam ring. Vanes are fitted to the rotor slots and increases pump efficiency.
follow the inner surface of the cam ring as the rotor turns.
Centrifugal force and pressure under the vanes hold them Pump delivery can be changed by changing the ring or
out against the cam ring. Pumping chambers are formed installing a new cartridge kit. Table 2 shows available
between the vanes and the cam ring and are enclosed by delivery options. Cartridge kit part numbers are tabulated in
the two support plates. the parts and service drawings (see Table 1.).
The 282/283 series pumps are of a balanced intra-vane

design (see Figure 2.). Outlet pressure is constantly applied
Outlet
Rotation Outlet support plate
feeds full load
pressure to
System intra-vane area at
Pressure all times. Continuous
Outlet
Pressure
Inlet or
Outlet
Pressure
High
Pressure
Quadrant Inlet
Rotation
Holes in rotor segments

feed load pressure under
full vane area in pressure
Low quadrant and inlet pressure
Pressure under vane area in inlet
Quadrant quadrants.
Figure 2. Vane Pump Operation
4
Section IV – Installation and Operating Instructions
A. Installation Drawings 5. NOTE

For information on pickling, refer to 694.
The installation drawings listed in Table 1 show operating
characteristics, installation dimensions and port locations. 2. To minimize flow resistance and the possibility of
leakage, only as many fittings and connections as are
necessary for proper installation should be used.
B. Mounting and Drive Connections
6. 3. The number of bends in tubing should be kept to a
minimum to prevent excessive turbulence and friction of oil
flow. Tubing must not be bent too sharply. The
CAUTION recommended minimum radius for bends is three times the
inside diameter of the tube.
Pump shafts are designed to be installed in couplings
with a slip fit. Pounding can injure the bearings. Shaft E. Hydraulic Fluid Recommendations
tolerances are shown on the installation drawings.
(See Table 1.)
9.
General Data
1. Direct Mounting – A pilot on the pump mounting
Fluid in a hydraulic system performs the dual function of
flange (Figure 3) assures correct mounting and shaft
lubrication and transmission of power. It constitutes a vital
alignment. Make sure the pilot is firmly seated in the
factor in a hydraulic system, and careful selection of it should
accessory pad of the power source. Care should be
be made with the assistance of a reputable supplier. Proper
exercised in tightening the mounting screws to prevent
selection of fluid assures satisfactory life and operation of
misalignment.
system components with particular emphasis on hydraulic
pumps. Any fluid selected for use with pumps is acceptable
for use with valves or motors.
Flange
Fluid recommendations noted in 694 are based on our
experience in industry as a hydraulic component
manufacturer. Where special considerations indicate a need
to depart from the recommended fluids or operating
conditions, see your Vickers sales engineer.
Cleanliness
Thorough precautions should always be observed to insure
Pilot
the hydraulic system is clean.
1. Clean (flush) entire new system to remove paint,

Figure 3. Mounting Flange and Pilot metal chips, welding shot, etc.
2. Indirect Drive is not recommended for these pumps 2. Filter each change of fluid to prevent introduction of
without Vickers engineering approval. contaminants into the system.
C. Shaft Rotation 7. 3. Provide continuous filtration of fluid to remove sludge

products of wear and corrosion generated during the life of
Pumps are assembled for either right hand (clockwise) or left the system.
hand (counterclockwise) shaft rotation as viewed from the
shaft end. 4. Provide continuous protection of system from entry
of filters, breathers, reservoirs, etc., cannot be over
emphasized.
CAUTION
5. During usage, proper fluid filling and servicing of
Never drive a pump in the wrong direction of filters, breathers, reservoirs, etc., cannot be over
rotation. Seizure will result, necessitating expensive emphasized.
repairs.
6. Thorough precautions should be taken by proper
D. Piping and Tubing 8. system and reservoir design, to insure that aeration of the
fluid will be kept to a minimum.
1. All pipes and tubing must be thoroughly cleaned
before installation. Recommended methods of cleaning are
sand blasting, wire brushing, pickling and power flushing
with clean solvent to remove loose particles.
5
F. Sound Levels 10. G. Overload Protection 11.
Although system noise levels can be reduced by modifying Relief valves limit pressure in the system to a prescribed
pump design, fluid conditions also play a major part in maximum and protect components from excessive pressure.
reducing system noise levels. The setting of the relief valve depends on the work
requirements of the system.
Some of the major factors affecting the fluid conditions that
cause the loudest noises in a hydraulic system are:
1. Very high viscosities at start-up temperatures can
H. Start-Up 12.
cause pump noise due to cavitation. With a minimum drive speed of 600 RPM, a pump should
2. Running with a moderately high viscosity fluid will prime almost immediately if provision is made to initially
impede the release of entrained air. The fluid will not be purge the air from the system.
completely purged of such air in the time it remains in the
reservoir before recycling through the system. Failure to prime within a reasonable time may result in
damage due to lack of lubrication. The pump inlet line must
3. Aerated fluid can be caused by ingestion of air be filled with fluid and must be tight and free from air leaks. It
through the pipe joints of inlet lines, high velocity discharge may be necessary to crack a fitting on the outlet side of the
lines, cylinder rod packings or by fluid discharging above the pump to purge air trapped in the system.
fluid level in the reservoir. Air in the fluid causes a noise
similar to cavitation.
Section V – Service and Maintenance
A. Circuit Inspection 13. B. Adding Fluid to the System 14.

Periodic inspection of the fluid condition and tube or pipe line When hydraulic fluid is added to replenish the system, it
connections can save time-consuming breakdowns and should always be poured through a clean wire screen (200
unnecessary parts replacement. The following should be mesh or finer) or preferably pumped through a 10 micron
checked regularly: (absolute) filter.
It is important that the fluid be clean and free of any
1. All hydraulic connections must be kept tight. A loose substance which could cause improper operation or wear of
connection in a pressure line will permit the fluid to leak out. the pump or other hydraulic units. Therefore, the use of cloth
If the fluid level becomes so low as to uncover the inlet pipe to strain the fluid should be avoided to prevent lint getting
opening in the reservoir, extensive damage to the pump can into the system.
result. In suction or return lines, loose connections permit air
to be drawn into the system resulting in noisy and/or erratic
operation. C. Adjustments 15.
No periodic adjustments are required, other than to maintain
2. Clean fluid is the best insurance for long service life. proper shaft alignment with the driving medium.
Therefore, the reservoir should be checked periodically for
dirt or other contaminants. If the fluid becomes
contaminated, the system should be drained and the
D. Lubrication 16.
reservoir cleaned before new fluid is added. Internal lubrication is provided by the fluid in the system.
Lubrication of the shaft coupling should be as specified by
3. Filter elements also should be checked and replaced their manufacturers. Coat shaft splines with a dry lubricant
periodically. A clogged filter element results in a higher (Molycoat or equivalent) to prevent wear.
pressure drop. This can force particles through the filter
which would ordinarily be trapped, or can cause the by-pass E. Replacement Parts 17.
to open, resulting in a partial or complete loss of filtration. Reliable operation throughout the specified operating
range is assured only if genuine Vickers parts are used.
4. Air bubbles in the reservoir can ruin the pump and Sophisticated design processes and material are used
other components. If bubbles are seen, locate the source of in the manufacture of our parts.
the air and seal the leak. Substitutes may result in early failure. Part numbers are
shown in the parts drawings listed in Table 1.
5. A pump which is running excessively hot or noisy is a
Repair Kits – Commonly replace parts usually provided
potential failure. Should a pump become noisy or
in the form of a kit. (See Figure 4.) It is recommended
overheated, the machine should be shut down immediately that all such parts be replaced with the kit when a unit is
and the cause of improper operation corrected. overhauled.
6
F. Product Life 18.
CAUTION The longevity of these products is dependent upon
environment, duty cycle, operating parameters and
Individual cartridge parts are not interchangeable system cleanliness. Since these parameters vary from
with similar parts of previous design models. application to application, the ultimate user must
Complete cartridge kits are interchangeable with determine and establish the periodic maintenance
previous designs. required to maximize life and detect potential
component failure.
Rotor, vane and Sealing Ring
intra-vane
assembled Back-up G. Troubleshooting 19.
inside ring Ring
and O-ring Table 3 lists the common difficulties experienced with vane
pumps and hydraulic systems. It indicates probable causes
Inlet
and remedies for each of the troubles listed.
Support
Plate
Outlet
Screw Support
Plate
Bushing Ring
Location Pin
Figure 4. Preassembled Cartridge Kit
TROUBLE PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

Excessive noise in pump. Low oil level in reservoir. Fill reservoir to proper level with
recommended fluid.
Air in system. Open reservoir cap and operate system
until purged.
Bleed hydraulic lines at highest point
down stream of pump while system is
under pressure.
Vacuum condition. Check inlet (suction) line and fittings for
air leaks.
Oil too thick. Be certain correct type of oil is used in
system. Warm up pump in cold weather
until noise disappears.
Damaged or missing pump seals at Locate and replace damaged or missing
mating surfaces. seals.
Cartridge kit not assembled properly. Reassemble cartridge kit.
Pump inlet/outlet lines reversed. Replumb lines to proper port
connections.
Pump overheating. Internal leakage. If excessive internal leakage exists,
return to shop for complete overhaul.
Heat exchanger not functioning. Locate trouble and repair or replace.
System
y not developing
g pressure. Relief valve open. Repair or replace.
Loss of fluid internally (slippage). Return to shop for evaluation and repair.
Cartridge kit not assembled properly. Reassemble kit.
Cartridge kit assembled for opposite Reassemble kit to proper rotation.
rotation.
Pump inlet/outlet lines reversed. Replumb lines to proper port
connnections.
Disconnected or broken drive Locate and repair.
mechanism.
Loss of fluid. Ruptured hydraulic lines. Locate and repair.
Leaking or missing seals. Locate and repair.
Table 3. Troubleshooting Chart
7
Section VI – Overhaul
A. Service Tools 20. B. Unit Removal
Standard Tools
1. One torque wrench with short extension and sockets. WARNING
Select appropriate torque wrench according to cover
screw specifications noted in Table 4. Turn off all electrical power and relieve hydraulic
2. One medium size screw driver. pressure. Lower all vertical cylinders. Block any
3. One torque screw driver (125 lb. in. maximum). load whose movement could generate pressure.
4. One internal retaining ring pliers. 1. Close off hydraulic oil source to pump inlet if an
5. Hydraulic oil lubricant or equivalent (SAE 10W motor overhead reservoir is used.
oil).
2. Remove the unit from the system.
NOTE
In addition to the above tools, an arbor press may 3. Cap all system and unit openings to prevent entry of
be required to service the shaft bearing. A small dirt or moisture.
ball peen hammer and a center punch may also be
helpful during removal of the shaft key. C. Disassembly
Special Tools The index numbers on Figure 8 are in order of the
disassembly sequence.
A shaft seal driver (Figure 5) is the only special tool required
for overhaul. 1. Thoroughly clean pump exterior.
B 2. Use a prick punch and mark the position of cover (4)

C
with respect to the body (29). Mark position of the flange with
respect to cover on VT models.
D A 3. Remove the two screws (1) and remove the
mounting flange from the pump.
4. Remove the key (2) from the shaft (26).

NOTE
The following step (5) pertains to 25VT, 35VT or
Break sharp 45VT thru-shaft models only. Refer to Figure 8.
edges and polish 5. Disassemble (VT) thru-shaft parts as follows:
1/16 15_
0.125
a. Remove four screws (5) from adapter flange (6).
Remove the adapter flange from inlet cover (4).
E b. Remove and discard “O” rings (7) from both sides

of adapter flange.
0.500
4.00 c. Remove spline coupling (8) from end of shaft
(20). Do not remove retaining ring (9) from coupling.
d. Remove four screws (10) from inlet cover (4).

Note: All Dimensions are in inches Remove the inlet cover from body (29).
Dimensions 6.Remove the four screws (3) from cover (4) and
Model A B C D E remove cover (*5V models only).
25V 2.045 1.683 1.468 1.343
.001 .001 .001 .001 0.250 7.Remove cartridge kit (11) from shaft (26).
35V 2.832 1.997 1.758 1.687 8.Remove seals (12 through 15) from cartridge kit (11).
.001 .001 .001 .001 0.250
Proceed to disassemble cartridge kit (11) according to
45V 3.145 2.371 2.281 1.906 .437 number sequence.
.001 .001 .001 .001
9.Pry under one coil and remove the spirolox ring (23)
out of the body (29). See Figure 6.
Figure 5. Shaft Seal Driver
8
c. Inspect bushing for wear and scoring. Wear on
one side indicates that the pump and drive motor were not
Spirolox Ring (31) aligned. See Figure 4.
2. Check bearing (25) for wear, looseness and pitted or

cracked races.
3. Inspect the seal and bushing mating surfaces on

shaft (26) for scoring and wear. Replace the shaft if marks
Hooked Tool cannot be removed by light polishing.
F. Assembly
Figure 6. Removing Spirolox Ring Refer to parts and service drawing listed in Table 1 for
replacement parts. Always replace old seals with new seals
when overhauling a unit. If a cartridge kit needs replacing,
10. Pull the shaft group (24 through 26) from the body
new seals are included in the cartridge kit.
(29). If the bearing (25) or shaft (26) needs replacement,
remove retaining ring (24) and press the bearing off the shaft Apply a light film of hydraulic fluid to all component parts to
with an arbor press. Apply pressure to the inner race of the facilitate assembly and provide initial lubrication. Install parts
bearing during removal. in reverse order of disassembly. See Figure 8.
11. Remove washer (27) from body. 1. Install shaft seal (28) into body (29) so that the
spring in the seal faces the inside of the pump. Press the
12. Drive the shaft seal (28) out of body (29). shaft seal into the body. Use shaft seal tool shown in Figure
5 and an arbor press.
D. Cleaning 21.
2. Install washer (27) into body.
All parts must be thoroughly cleaned and kept clean during
inspection and assembly. Contamination in the unit will 3. If required, press bearing (25) on to shaft (26) and
cause excessive wear, leakage and decreased service life. secure with retaining ring (24).
Use a commercial solvent which is compatible with the
system fluid. Thoroughly clean all parts. Drying parts with 4. Recheck shaft key way for nicks and burrs that could
compressed air after cleaning is not recommended unless cut the shaft seal. Remove burrs. Thoroughly lubricate the
the air is completely filtered to remove water and key way end of shaft and shaft seal lip with hydraulic oil.
contamination. Carefully install shaft group (items 24 through 26) through
the seal and into body (29). Spread the spirolox ring (23) and
E. Inspection, Repair & Replacement feed it into the groove located behind the bearing. This will
secure the shaft group within body (29).
Check that all internal passages are clean and unobstructed.
Examine all mating surfaces for nicks and burrs. Check 5. Assembly sealing ring (14) into body (29).
locating pins and holes for wear and burrs. Check the
condition of threaded parts and threaded holes. Check all 6. If a new cartridge kit is required, install new cartridge
retaining ring recesses. Minor burrs can be removed with an kit (11) on the shaft and into the body (29). If cartridge kit
India stone. Replace any part that shows wear or damage. assembly is required, assemble in the reverse order of
The following parts are subject to special attention. disassembly. During assembly, note the following
precautions;
1. Cartridge Kit (11). In order to obtain maximum
overhaul life of the pump, a complete cartridge kit should be a. Make sure the rotation arrows on ring (19) and
installed if wear or scoring is noticed during the following rotor (20) point in the direction of rotation.
steps.
b. Be certain the sharp edges of vanes (21) lead in
a. Inspect the mating surfaces of the rotor (20), direction of pump rotation. See Figure 7.
outlet support plate (22) and inlet support plate (17).
c. Make sure “O” ring (12) and back-up ring (13) are
b. Inspect the vanes and intra-vanes (21) for burrs, positioned correctly as shown on Figure 8.
wear and play in the rotor (20) slots. The intra-vanes should
not bind in the vanes. Remove minor burrs with an India 7. Apply a small amount of hydraulic fluid on threads of
stone. two screws (16). Thread the screws into cartridge kit. Install
cartridge kit (11) on the shaft and into body (29).
9
a. Line up the two cartridge kit pins (18) with the
holes in inlet cover
Inlet
Direction of
Rotor rotation b. Install spline coupling (8) on end of shaft (26).
NOTE
If a new shaft and coupling kit is required,
install retaining ring (9) into coupling (8) prior
to coupling installation.
c. Install “O” rings (7) on both sides of adapter

flange (6).
d. Connect adapter flange (6) to inlet cover (4) with

four screws (5). (NOTE: Lockwashers are used with screw
(5) for ‘C’ adapter flanges only.) Torque screws (5) to
Sharp edges specifications noted in Table 5.
Ring
lead direction
Vane
of rotation
Screw (5) Torque Specifications
Model Adapter Flange N.m lb. ft.
Figure 7. Positioning Vanes in Rotor
25VT
35VT “A” or “B” 54–68 40–50
8. Install “O” ring (15) over the cartridge kit (11) and into
the body “O” ring groove. 45VT
35VT
9. Line up the two cartridge pins (18) with the holes in “C” 31 40
31–40 23 30
23–30
45VT
cover (4). Assemble cover (4) over cartridge kit and up
against body face. Position cover (4) according to markings Table 5. Screw (5) Torque Specifications
made during step C-2 of the disassembly procedure. Secure
the cover with four screws (3). Torque screws (3) to
specifications noted in Table 4. 11. Install key (2) on shaft (26).
Screw (3) Torque Specifications (Figure 8) 12. Place pump into mounting bracket (1) and secure it
with the two mounting bracket screws.
Model N.m lb. ft.
25V 88–101.6 65–75
35V 190–217 140–160
45V 345–372.8 255–275
Screw (10) (Figure 8)
25VT 88–101.6 65–75
35VT 190–216.9 140–160
45VT 345–359 255–275
Table 4. Torque Specifications for Screw (3)/(10)
Section VII – Start-Up and Test
A. Start-Up 22. prime in a short period of time indicates incorrect assembly

or restricted flow from the reservoir.
Install the unit into the system. Make sure the drive shaft is
aligned properly. Be sure all connections are tight and the
hydraulic fluid source is open to pump inlet before start-up. B. Test
Use your hydraulic system to test the unit. Refer to the
The pump should prime almost immediately with a minimum installation drawings listed in Table 1 for recommended
drive speed of 600 RPM. Intermittently operate (jog) the speeds and pressures. If more precise testing is desired,
pump until it primes. It may be necessary to loosen the outlet consult your Vickers sales engineering office.
fitting temporarily to purge trapped air. Failure of the pump to
10
6 **VT (Thru Shaft Models)
7 A
5
7 10
8 9
6 B
7
5
4
6
7 C
5 3
25
23 24
11
14 13 12
15
22
19
20 21
16 17
18
1
29
2 27 28
26
Item Nomenclature Qty. Item Nomenclature Qty.

1 Foot Bracket Kit 1 16 Screw 2
2 Key 1 17 Inlet Support Plate 1
3 Screw 4 18 Pin 2
4 Cover 1 19 Ring 1
5 Screw 4 20 Rotor 1
6 Adapter Flange 1 21 Vanes & Intra-Vanes 12
7 “O” Ring A/R 22 Outlet Support Plate 1
8 Spline Coupling 1 23 Spirolox Ring 1
9 Retaining Ring 1 24 Retaining Ring 1
10 Screw 4 25 Bearing 1
11 Cartridge Kit (items 12-22) 1 26 Shaft 1
12 Back-up Ring 1 27 Washer 1
13 “O” Ring 1 28 Shaft Seal 1
14 Sealing Ring 1 29 Body 1
15 “O” Ring 1
Figure 8. Exploded Parts Breakdown

11
Vickers®
Service Data
Vane Pumps
ThruĆDrive
Vane Type Pump
(F3)-45VT*(M)-**A(M)2-**-*-22
Rev 2/98 I-3151-S

ADAPTER ADAPTER SPACER RETAINING COUPLING COUPLING Included in seal kit (See Table)
MODEL
PLATE KIT KIT RING KIT F Included in cartridge kit (See Table)
VTA 584936 941296 223172 426770 02-136810 Included in coupling kit (See Table)
VTB 83003 (1) 02-136813 J Included in adapter kit (See Table)
584922 941297 584924
VTBP 02-136817 83003 (2) 02-136814 Included in spacer kit (BP models only)
VTC 581833 941298 103989 585658 02-136816 F3 equivalent seal kit (See Table)
Parts prefixed with symbols available
NOTE only in kits.
FOR BP MODELS AN ADAPTER KIT
AND SPACER KIT IS REQUIRED.
F 02–136718 Vane Kit

(Includes12 vanes & inserts)
F 578900 Rotor
F Ring (See Table)
F 578903 Inlet Plate S/A
J 298147 Bolt (4 Req’d)
Torque 55.2 – 67.8 N.m.
(40 – 50 lb. ft. )
J 351776 “O” Ring
J 154086 “O” Ring
J “A” Adapter Plate (See Table)
F 220888 Pin (2 Req’d)
F 289476 Screw (2 Req’d)

J 298147 Bolt (4 Req’d) Housing (See Table)
Torque 55.2 – 67.8 N.m.
(40 – 50 lb. ft. ) 353409 “O” Ring
Retaining Ring (See Table)
87947 Bolt (4 Req’d)

Torque 344 – 371 N.m. (255 – 275 lb. ft. )
Coupling (see Table)
J “B” Adapter Plate (See Table) MODEL SEAL KIT F3 SEAL KIT
J 154088 “O” Ring 45VTA 920201 920202
45VTB 920203 920204
588725 Spacer (See table) 45VTBP 02-136931 02-136932
(BP models only) 45VTC 920205 920206
375422 “O” Ring (BP models only)
427700 Washer (BP models only)
205436 Screw (2 Req’d)
(BP models only)
J “C” Adapter Plate (See Table)
435714 “O” Ring
J 582519 Washer (4 Req’d)
J 298148 Bolt (4 Req’d)
Torque 55.2 – 67.8 N.m.
(40 – 50 lb. ft. )
 Eaton Hydraulics, Incorporated 2000
All Rights Reserved
MODEL SHAFT KEY MODEL RING F CART KIT F3 CART KIT
45VT42 581679 02–102572 02–102576
45VTAS–*203 502418 239751 45VT45 582570 02–102573 02–102593
45VTAS–*297 502475 45VT50 581680 02–102574 02–102577
45VTAM–*292N 883277 472303 45VT60 578904 02–102575 02–102578
45VTB(P)S–*203 502419 239751
45VTB(P)S–*297 502480
45VTB(P)M–*292N 883280 472303
45VTCS–*203 502467 239751
45VTCS–*297 883274
45VTCM–*292N 883283 472303 502370 Flange (ISO – 45VT*M only)
(Included in 45VT*M Body S/A)
Body S/A (See Table)
F154107 “O”Ring
Key (See Table)
Shaft (See Table)

Torque 102-115 N.m (75-85 lb.ft.)
(Included in 45VT*M Body S/A)
V 394974 Shaft Seal
194878 Washer
131812 Bearing
102949 Retaining Ring
158630 Retaining Ring
MODEL HOUSING BODY S/A
F 588509 Ring
45VT*M**A 252283 02-136925
F154087 “O” Ring 45VT*M**AM 478507 02-136926
F 419675 Seal Ring 45VT*S**A 252283 02-136923
(Install into body, then 45VT*S**AM 478507 02-136924
install catrtidge kit)
F 580921 Outlet Plate
V Assemble seal with spring loaded
sealing member towards bearing. Seals
to be completely wetted with oil prior
to assembly.
NOTE
For satisfactory service life of these
components in industrial applications,
use full flow filtration to provide fluid
which meets ISO cleanliness code
16/13 or cleaner. OFP, OFR, and OFRS
series filters are recommended.
Model Code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1 Viton seals 6 Port connections 10 Outlet positions

Omit – Standard seals A – SAE 4 bolt flange (Viewed from adapter end of pump)
7 Port connection modifier A – Opposite inlet port
2 Thru drive series designation B – 90_ CCW from inlet
45VT – 138 to 193 cm3/r M – Metric thread port connection C – In line with inlet
(8.41 to 11.75 in3/r) (4 bolt flange) D – 90_ CW from inlet
Omit – Inch thread port connection
(4 bolt flange)
3 Rear pump mounting SAE 11 Thru–drive adapter orientation
(ISO 3019/1) 2 – bolt 8 Thru–drive coupling (Viewed from adapter end of pump)
A – 2-bolt SAE “A” 2 – Coupling (included with pump)
A adapter
B – 2-bolt SAE “B” Pump Tail shaft pump
BP – 2-bolt SAE “B” to mount series requirements A – Rotate 45_ CW with respect
PVE12/19/21 (Includes spacer) to pump mounting flange
C – 2-bolt SAE “C” 45VTA SAE “A” size w/30_ B – Rotate 45_ CCW with respect
involute spline, to pump mounting flange
9T 16/32 D.P. B or C adapter
4 Pilot designation
M – ISO 3019/2 100A2HW 45VTB SAE “B” size w/30_ A – In line with pump mounting flange
S – SAE – J744 flange involute spline, B – Rotate 90_ with respect to pump
13T 16/32 D.P. mounting flange
5 Geometric displacement 45VTC SAE “C” size w/30_

involute spline, 12 Design
(Rated capacity (USgpm) at
14T 12/24 D.P.
1200 rpm, 6.9 bar (100 psi)
13 Rotation
Frame
Size Code cm3/r in3/r 9 Shaft
(Viewed from shaft end of pump)
203 – Heavy duty square key
45V 42 138 8.41 292N – ISO key 8mm x 12mm L – Left hand for counterclockwise
T 45 147 9.00 (M pilot only) R – Right hand for clockwise
50 162 9.85 297 – 14T 12/24 splined SAE ‘C’
60 193 11.75
NOTE NOTE
To reverse cartridge kit rotation, remove When ordering spare cartridge parts, it is
the two screws and reverse the location of recommended they be obtained in car-
the inlet support plate and outlet support tridge kits. Kits are assembled and tested
plate. Re–install the two screws hand tight. by Vickers for either right or left hand rota-
Use pump cover to align all sections of the tion. If left hand rotation is required, it
cartridge. Carefully remove the cover and should be specified on parts order by add-
tighten the screws. ing suffix “L” to cartridge kit number.
Sharp Edges of Vane Must

Lead in Direction of Rotation
LH RH
LH RH
RH LH
RH LH
L.H. Rotation R.H. Rotation

Eaton Hydraulics
15151 Highway 5 46 New Lane, Havant
Eden Prairie, MN 55344 Hampshire PO9 2NB
Telephone: 612 937-7254 England
Fax: 612 937-7130 Telephone: (44) 170-548-6451
www.eatonhydraulics.com Fax: (44) 170-548-7110
Form No. 00-000 Copyright Eaton Corporation, 0000

All rights reserved.
Printed in U.S.A
VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES


VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES


Service Data Vickers®
Pressure Relief
Single Type Pressure Relief Module

DGMC-5-*T-*W-(E)-20
Model ”A” ”B” Pressure Range JĂRelief Diagram
(A or B End) Spring Spring bar (PSI) Valve Kit Model Body Plate
DGMC-5-*T-AW 681645 5.2 - 35 (75-500) 926534 DGMC-5-AT-AW-*W-(E)-20 595968 631914
DGMC-5-*T-BW 681646 631770 8.5 - 70 (125-1000) 926535 DGMC-5-BT-BW-*W-(E)-20 595969 631916
DGMC-5-*T-CW 681647 8.5 - 140 (125-2000) 926536 DGMC-5-PT-CW-*W-(E)-20 595970 631917
DGMC-5-*T-FW 681648 688768 8.5 - 250 (125-3600) 926537
Assemble parts at this end for
DGMC-5-BT-*W-20
Y 263496
Use on ’PT’ ”O” Ring L 761620 Plug
models only (Use on ”E” external
L 315932 Plug
drain models only)
JY197575 Back-up Ring (Torque 29-32 N.m
JY197575
JY 262335 ”O” Ring Back-up Ring
(21-24 lb. ft.)
Â
J 597260 Sleeve JY 262337
”O” Ring
J 597258 Poppet Ã
J ”B” Spring (See table)
JY197577 Back-up Ring
JY262339 ”O” Ring
Ä
J 290057 Poppet Æ
LJ 122310 Shim Diagram Plate
J ”A” Spring (See table) Å (See table)
J 681644 Adj. Pin Á Ç

À
JY262329 Y 263494
”O” Ring L 416834
”O” Ring Rivet (2 req’d)
JY197567 :L 343470
Back-up Ring J 681643 Plug Y 262334
Seat ”O” Ring
L 761620 (5 req’d)
LJ 471416 Plug (Use on ”E” external
Pin Drain Models only)
JY 262341 ”O” Ring z Body (See table)
J 686338
Retainer
J 629806 Plate
(Bond to retainer)
LJ 531761 Nut 343470 Plug Installation Table
Assemble parts at this end for Torque 15-16 N.m (11-12 lb. ft.)
DGMC-5-AT/PT-*W-20 Model Use Location
J Included in Relief Valve Kit DGMC-5-AT-*W-20 1,2,3,6,8
DGMC-5-AT-*W-E-20 2,3,6,8
L Available only in Kits of 25 each DGMC-5-BT-*W-20 2,3,4,5,7
DGMC-5-BT-*W-E-20 2,4,5,7
Y Included in F3 Seal Kit 920338 Refer to 343740 Plug installation
table to determine correct plugs DGMC-5-PT-*W-20 1,2,3,6,8
z Not available for sale for each model DGMC-5-PT-*W-E-20 2,3,6,8
Revised 2/01/98 I-3421-S

Model Code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 Seal Material 6 Drain Port 11 Screw & Locknut Adjustment

F3 - Seals for mineral oil and fire T - Tank
12 Drain
resistant fluids
E - External drain
7 Pressure Range
Omit for standard internal drain
2 Model Series
Bar PSI
DGMC - Directional valve, manifold or A - 5.2-35 (75-500)
subplate mounted, module B - 8.5-70 (125-1000) 13 Design
pressure relief, single type C - 8.5-140 (125-2000)
F - 8.5-250 (125-3600)
3 Interface
NFPA-D02
(ISO 4401-05)
4 Port Acted Upon

A - Cylinder ’A’
B - Cylinder ’B’
P - Pressure ’P’
DGMC - 5 - AT/PT - *W - (E) - 20 Sectional View
For satisfactory service life of these components, use full flow filtration to provide fluid which meets ISO cleanliness code
20/18/15 or cleaner. Selections from Eaton OFP,OFR and OFRS filter series are recommended. Printed in U.S.A.
–2–
VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES


VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES


Vickers™
Spare parts information
Ersatzteilinformation
Fiche de pièces détachées
Bollettino parti di ricambio
Ventiles
SystemStak
Reducing Valves
Druckminderventile
Soupapes de réduction de pression
Valvola riduttrice
DGM X2 - 3 - P* (L) - * * - * - 40
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 SystemStak Valve 1 SystemStak Ventil 1 Appareil SystemStak 1 Valvola Systemstak

Manifold or Subplate Mounted Block oder AnschlußplattenmonĆ Montage sur bloc foré ou plaque Montaggio a blocchi o a
tage de base piastra
2 Reducing 2 Druckminder 2 Fonction de réduction 2 Riduttrice/Sequenza
X2 - Reducing Valve X2 - Druckminderventil X2 - soupape de réduction de X2 - Valvola riduttrice
pression
3 Interface 3 Anschlußbild 3 Plan de pose 3 Interfacci
3 - ISO 4401-3 3 - ISO 4401-3 3 - ISO 4401-3 3 - ISO 4401-3
4 Pilot Control Port 4 Steureanschluß 4 Alimentation de pilotage 4 Attacco pilotaggio di controllo
PP - P line pilot PP - Steuerung von P PP - ligne P PP - lignea di pilotaggio P
PA - A line pilot PA - Steuerung von A PA - ligne A PA - lignea di pilotaggio A
PB - B line pilot PB - Steuerung von B PB - ligne B PB - lignea di pilotaggio B
5 Adjustment 5 Einstellung 5 Réglage 5 Regolazione
L - Adjustment at "A" port end L - Einstellung auf seite Anschulß L - réglage du côté de l ' orifice A L - regalozione estremita' dell ' attacco A
6 Pressure Range 6 Druckbereich 6 Plage de tarage 6 Campo di pressione
A - 3.0 - 30 bar (44-435 psi) A - 3.0 - 30 bar (44-435 psi) A - 3.0 à 30 bar (44-435 psi) A - 3.0 - 30 bar (44-435 psi)
B - 3.5 - 70 bar (52-1015 psi) B - 3.5 - 70 bar (52-1015 psi) B - 3.5 à 70 bar (52-1015 psi) B - 3.5 - 70 bar (52-1015 psi)
C - 10 - 140 bar (145-2030 psi) C - 10 - 140 bar (145-2030 psi) C - 10 à 140 bar (145-2030 psi) C - 10 - 140 bar (145-2030 psi)
F - 20 - 250 bar (290-3625 psi) F - 20 - 250 bar (290-3625 psi) F - 20 à 250 bar (290-3625 psi) F - 20 - 250 bar (290-3625 psi)
7 Adjustment Type 7 Einstellvorrichtung 7 Mode de réglage 7 Tipo di regolazione
W - Screw W/Locknut (standard) W - Schraube mit Kontermutter W - vis et contre-écrou W - Vite con dado di bloccaggio
H - Handknob (option) (Standard) (standard) (standard)
K - Handknob W/Keylock (option) H - Handeinstellknopf H - molette (option) H - Manopola (opzionale)
(wahlweise) K - molette avec verrouillage à clé K - Manopola con chiave di blocco
K - Handeinstellknopf mit Schloß (option) (opzionale)
(wahlweise)
8 Gage Port Thread Type 8 Manometeranschulß 8 Filetage de l ' orifices de 8 Attacchi filettati manometro
B - G 1/8 manométre B - G 1/8
B - G 1/8
S - SAE 4 (7/16-20 UNF) S - 4 SAE (.4375-20 UNF-2B) B - G 1/8" S - 4 SAE (.4375-20 UNF-2B)
S - orifice SAE 4
(7/16-20 UNF-2B)
9 Design 9 Seriennummer 9 Numéro de dessin 9 Serie
All repairs must be made in clean condiĆ Alle reparaturen müssen in eiĆ Toutes les réparations doivent Le riparazioni devono essere
tions and by clean practices compatible ner sauberen Umegebung être faites dans des conditions effettuate in ambiente pulito
with subsequent efficient operations of durchgeführt werden. Die HyĆ saines et par des moyens proĆ per consentire un regolare funĆ
the unit in systems having oil to ISO 4406 draulik flüssigkeit nach ISO pres compatibles avec le foncĆ zionamento dei componenti
grade 18/14 or cleaner. 4406 sollte einem ReinheitsĆ tionnement correct de l'appareil dei sistemi idraulici che utilizzaĆ
grad von 18/14 oder besser dans un système utilisant de l ' no oli con profilo di contaminaĆ
entsprechen. huile de pureté égale ou supéĆ zione di 18/14 o superiore conĆ
rieure à la norme ISO 4406; forme alle norme ISO 4406.
18/14.
Released 10-1-90 I-3761-G
1
Model DGMX2-3-P* shown, reverse items A and B for model DGMX2-3-P*L.
Dargestellt ist baureihe DGMX2-3-P*. Für Baureihe DGMX2-3-P*L sind die Pos. A und B umgehehrt
montiert.
Modèle illustré: DGMX2-3-P*. DGMX2-3-P*L: A et B inversès
In figura il modello DGMX2-3-P*; per il modello DGMX2-3-P*L invertire i particolari A e B.
Item Model designation Spool

Pos. Typenbezeichnung Kolben
Rep. Code de désignation Tiroir B
Pos. Codice di identificazione Cursore
DGMX2-3-PA 694194
13
DGMX2-3-PAL 694195 23 15
DGMX2-3-PB 694194 22
19 17
DGMX2-3-PBL 694195
DGMX2-3-PP 694194
DGMX2-3-PPL 694195 19
24
P A 14
11 B T
10 16
18
8
22
6 25
12
4
2
21 20
9
10a
7 Item Model designation Body

5 Pos. Typenbezeichnung Gehäuse
Rep. Code de désignation Corps
3 Pos. Codice di identificazione Corpo
1 DGMX2-3-PA 694151
DGMX2-3-PAL 694152
A DGMX2-3-PB 694149
25
DGMX2-3-PBL 694150
DGMX2-3-PP 694147
DGMX2-3-PPL 694148
Item Torque values

Pos. Anziehmoment
Rep. Couples de serrage
Pos. Coppie di serraggio
2 40-45 Nm. (30-33 lb.in.)
8 50-55 Nm. (37-41 lb.in.)
13 7-7.5 Nm. (62-65 lb.in.)
11-12 Nm. (97-106 lb.in.)
15 30-35 Nm. (22-26 lb.in.)
2
Item Part no.
Pos. Teile-Nr.
Rep. Nde pièce
Pos. No.pezzo Description Bezeichnung Désignation Descrizione
1 694236 Nut Kontermuttert (M8x.75) Ecrou (M8x.75) Dado (M8x.75)
2 694162 Adj. Housing Gehäuse Einstellung Bouchon persé pour passage Sede del regolatore
de vis
3 262341 O-Ring O-Ring Joint torique O-Ring
5 694237 Adj. Screw Einstellschraube Vis de réglage Vite di regolazione
6 472861 Ball Kugel Bille Sfera
7 694154 Spring Rest Federteller Siège de ressort Sede appoggio molla
8 694161 Spring Housing Federhükse Logment de ressort Alloggiamento molla
10 694156 Spring (A) Feder (A) Ressort (A) Molla (A)
10 694157 Spring (B) Feder (B) Ressort (B) Molla (B)
10 694158 Spring (C) Feder (C) Ressort (C) Molla (C)
10 694159 Spring (F Only) Feder (nur bei F) Ressort (F uniquement) Molla (F) solo
10a 694160 Spring (F Only) Feder (nur bei F) Ressort (F uniquement) Molla (F) solo
11 694153 Spring Rest Federteller Siège de ressort Sede appoggio molla
12 472861 Ball Kugel Bille Sfera
13 473982 Plug (B) Stopfen (B) Bouchon (B) Tappo (B)
13 694234 Plug (S) Stopfen (S) Bouchon (S) Tappo (S)
14 781983 Seal (B) Dichtring (B) Joint (B) Guamizione (B)
14 262332 O-Ring (S) O-Ring (S) Joint torique (S) O-Ring (S)
15 694184 Plug (BSP) Stopfen (BSP) Bouchon (BSP) Tappo (BSP)
15 694196 Plug (SAE) Stopfen (SAE) Bouchon (SAE) Tappo (SAE)
16 244619 Back-up Ring Stützring Bague anti-extrusion Anello antiestrusione
19 See table Spool Kolben Tiroir Cursore
20 472553 Pin (Omit E)(3 x 6mm) Stift (Entfällt bei typ E)(3 x 6mm) Pion (E omis) (3 x 6mm) Spina (rrealasciare E)(3 x 6mm)
21 262332 (40 O-Ring O-Ring Joint torique O-Ring
22 416834 (2) Rivet Niet Rivet Rivetto
23 ------ Nameplate Typenschild Plaque signalétique Piastrina
24 473884 (2) Plug Stopfen Bouchon Tappo
25 See table Body Gehäuse Corps Corpo
26 694235 Adj. Sleeve Hülse Einstellung Manchon de réglange Bussola per la regolazione
27 868253 Knob Knopf Molette Manopola
28 416290 Screw Schraube Vis Vite
30 868249 Sleeve Hülse Manchon Bussola
31 694235 Adj. Sleeve Hülse Einstellung Manchon de réglage Bussola per la regolazione
32 868251 (3) Pin Stift Goupille Spina
33 868254 (3) Spring Feder Ressort Molla
34 868250 Adapter Zwischenstück Adaptateur Adattatore
35 416290 Screw Schraube Vis Vita
37 226753 Pin Stift Ergot Spina
38 761093 Keylock Schloß Serrure Chiave di bloccaggio
39 148640 Pin Stift Goupille Spina
(*) for quantites greater than 1 (*) Stückzahl > 1 (*) = pour quantités >1. (*) Per quantitativi >1
Not available for sale. Nicht als Ersatzteil erhältlich. Non disponible séparément. Non in vendita singolarmente
Available in seal kit 870739 Im Dichtungsatz 870739 Compris dans la pochette Disponibile in kit di guarniĆ
enthalten de joints 870739 zioni 870739
Available in hand knob adjuster
(without keylock) conversion kit 868794 Lieferbar als Einstellknopf- Compris dans le kit de converĆ Disponibile nel kit di conĆ
Umbausatz 868794. sion 868794 pour la molette de versione della manopola di reĆ
Available in hand knob adjuster
réglage sans verrouillage à clé. golazione (senza chiave di
(with keylock) conversion kit 868795 Lieferbar als Einstell bloccaggio) 868794.
In S/A 02-108634 knopf-Umbausatz 868795 Compris dans le kit de converĆ
sion 868794 pour la molette de Disponibile nel kit di conĆ
Im Bausatz 20-108634 versione della manopola di reĆ
In S/A 02-108633 réglage avec verrouillage á clé.
enthalten golazione (con chiave di blocĆ
Available only in kits Im Bausatz 20-108633 Compris dans le sous-enĆ caggio) 868795.
of 10 pieces. enthalten. semble 02-108634
Compris dans le sous-enĆ In kit 02-108634
Nur lieferbar in 10
einheiten semble 02-108633 In kit 02-108633
Disponibles uniquement en
kit de 10 ressorts Dispohible in kit da 10 pezzi
3
Hand Knob Adjuster (Without Handeinstellknopf, (ohne Montage du kit de conversion Istruzioni per il kit di conversione
Keylock) Conversion kit instrucĆ Schloß) Umbauanweisungen pour molette de réglage sans verĆ di regolazione (senza chiave di
tions rouillage à clé bloccaggio).
Remove locknut from item 5 and Kontermutter vom Teil 5 entferĆ Retirer le contre-écrou de la vis Togliere il dado di bloccaggio dal
discard. Turn item 5 clockwise nen. Teil 5 nach rechts bis zum rep. 5; celui-ci ne sera pas particolare 5 e metterlo da parte.
until it is against the stop. Install Anschlag drehen. Teil 26 in Teil 5 réutilisé. Visser à fond le rep. 5 Ruotare in senso orario il particoĆ
item 26 onto item 5. Slide item 27 montieren. Teil 27 auf das GeĆ dans le sens horaire. Monter le lare 5 finche ' non tocca il fermo.
against housing on item 2. Lock häuse Tiel 2 schieben, und auf rep. 26 sur le rep. Pousser le rep. Mettere il particolare 26 sul 5. Far
in place with item 28.Adjust to Position mit Teil 28 arretieren. 27 jusqu ' à ce qu ' il bute contre le scorrere il particolare 27 verso la
desired setting. Tighten item 29 Teil 29 festziehen um die corps du rep. 2. Bloquer à l ' aide sede sul particolare 2. Bloccarlo
to maintain. gewünschte Druckeinstellung du rep. 28. Serrer le rep. 29 pour in posizione col particolare 28.
beizubehalten. maintenir le réglage à la valeur Regolare fino ad ottenere la presĆ
Available in hand knob adjustĆ
désirée. sione di tarature desiderata.
er (without keylock) conversion
kit 868794
Lieferbar als Einstellknopf-UmĆ Compris dans le kit de converĆ Avvitare il particolare 29 per
bausatz 868794. (ohne Schloß) sion 868794 pour la molette de réĆ fisaria.
glage sans verrouillage à clé.
Disponibile nel kit di converĆ
sione della manopola di regolaĆ
27 6 2 zione (senza chiave di bloccagĆ
29 gio) 868794
28 26
Hand Knob Adjuster (With KeyĆ Handeinstellknopf, (mit Schloß) Montage du kit de conversion Istruzioni per il kit di conversione
lock) Conversion kit instructions Umbauanweisungen pour molette de réglage avec della manopola di regolazione
Remove locknut from item 5 and Kontermutter vom Teil 5 verrouillage à clé (con chiave di bloccaggio).
discard. Press item 30 lightly entfernen. Teil 30 auf Teil 2 Retierer le contre-écrou de la vis Togliere il dado di bloccaggio dal
onto item 2. Turn item 5 clockĆ pressen. Teil 5 nach rechts bis rep. 5; celui-ci ne sera pas particolare 5 e metterlo da parte.
wise until it is against the stop. zum Anschlag drehen. Teile 31 in réutilisé. Pousser lègérement le Premere leggermente il partiĆ
Slide item 31 onto item 5. Install Teil 5 schieben. Teile 32 & 33 in rep. 30 sur le rep. 2. Visser à fond colare 30 sul 2. Ruotare in senso
items 32 & 33 into item 34 and Teil 34 einbauen, bündig gegen le rep. 5 dans le sens horaire. orario il particolare 5 finche' non
assemble flush against item 30. Teil 30 montieren, und auf Monter le rep. 31 sur le rep. 5. InĆ tocca il fermo. Far scorrere il partiĆ
Lock in place with item 35. Slide Position mit Teil 35 arretieren. Teil staller les rep. 32 et 33 dans le rep. colare 31 sul 5. Inserire i particolar
item 36 over item 34. Press item 36 auf Teil 34 schieben. Teil 37 34, puis mettre en place contre le 32 e 33 nel 34 e metterli a filo del
37 flush. Install item 38 in item bündig ein pressen. Teil 38 in Teil rep. 30. Bloquer à l' aide du rep. particolare 30. Bloccare in posizioĆ
36. Press in item 39 until it botĆ 36 montieren. Teil 39 bis zum AnĆ 35. Enfiler le rep. 36 par-dessus ne col particolare 35. Far scorrere il
toms out in item 38. schlag in Teil 38 pressen. le rep. 34. Enfoncer suffisamment particolare 36 sul 34. Premere a filo
Available in hand knob adjustĆ Lieferbar als Einstellknopf-UmĆ le rep. 37 pour pouvoir introduire il particolare 37. Inserire il particoĆ
er (with keylock) conversion kit bausatz 868795 (mit Schloß) le rep. 38 dans le rep. 36. EnfoncĆ lare 38 nel 36. Spingere verso l ' inĆ
868795 er à fond le rep. 39 dans le rep. 38. terno il particolare 39 finche' non
tocca l ' estremita del 38.
Compris dans le kit de conĆ
version 868795 pour la molette
5 de réglage avec verrouillage à Disponibile nel kit di converĆ
36 2 clé. sione della manopola di regolaĆ
38 33 32 zione (con chiave di bloccaggio)
868795
34 31 30
39 35
37
Vickers Incorporated
5445 Corporate Drive
P. O. Box 302
Troy, Michigan 48007-0302
U.S.A.
The right to modifications for technical improvements is reserved. Printed in U.S.A.

4
VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES


VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES


Vickers®
Service Data
Check Valves
Check Valves
C* G-800 Series
CAUTION
*Note When a C5G is used to
The valve seat is installed through replace a C2G or C3G,
the front as shown on the C3G, drill an appropriate hole in
C4G & C5G series. On the C2G the mounting surface to accomodate
series, the seat is installed from the extra rest pin of the C5G and plug
the back of the mounting surface. the unused hole. The pins prevent re-
versal of the valve on the mounting
surface, which could cause a system
malfunction and/or injury to personnel.
If body is required,
order a new valve.
Seal (See table)
154132 ‘‘O’’ Ring

81976 Plug
Pin (See table)
154128 ‘‘O’’ Ring

315932 Plug
Model Spring Cracking Valve Plug Seals Pin

*Seat
Pressure (2 req’d) (2 req’d)
C2G-815 104403 262395 102679
C3G/C4G-815 2943 5 PSI 263886 154020 160571
C5G-815
C2G-815-S2 104403 262395 102679
C3G/C4G-815-S2 36316 35 PSI
263886 154020 160571
C5G-815-S2
81589
C2G-815-S3 104403 262395 102679
C3G/C4G-815-S3 25896 50 PSI 263886 154020 160571
C5G-815-S3
C2G-815-S8 104403 262395 102679
C3G/C4G-815-S8 32999 75 PSI
263886 154020 160571
C5G-815-S8
C2G-815-S12 104403 262395 102679
C3G/C4G-815-S12 2943 5 PSI 108708 81592 263886 154020 160571
C5G-815-S12
C2G-815-S17 104403 262395 102679
C3G/C4G-815-S17 84235 125 PSI 263886 154020 160571
C5G-815-S17
C2G-815-S19 104403 262395 102679
C3G/C4G-815-S19 2287 20 PSI 81589
263886 154020 160571
C5G-815-S19
C2G-815-S20 104403 262395 102679
C3G/C4G-815-S20 83902 1 PSI
263886 154020 160571
C5G-815-S20
Revised 01-01-85 I-3578-S
Order and use mounting bolt kit BK CG825-615 If body is required, CAUTION
if a C4G/C5G-825 valve is used to replace a order a new valve. When a C5G is used to
C2G-825 or a C3G-825 valve. replace a C2G or C3G,
drill an appropriate hole in
the mounting surface to accomodate
the extra rest pin of the C5G and plug
the unused hole. The pins prevent re-
versal of the valve on the mounting
surface, which could cause a system
malfunction and/or injury to personnel.
81591 Plug
Plug (See table) (Used on C*G-825-S12 only)
5402 Seat
‘‘O’’ Ring (See table)
265793 Spacer
(Used on
C3G & C4G only)
Model Spring Cracking Valve

Pressure
C2G-825
C3G/C4G-825 2284 5 PSI
C5G-825
C2G-825-S2
C3G/C4G-825-S2 2953 35 PSI
C5G-825-S2 Seals Pin
108359 Model
C2G-825-S3 Inlet Outlet (2 req’d)
C3G/C4G-825-S3 29059 50 PSI C2G 42310 102679
C5G-825-S3 C3G
C2G-825-S8 C4G Y154026 Y154077 160571
C3G/C4G-825-S8 39778 75 PSI C5G
C5G-825-S8
C2G-825-S12
C3G/C4G-825-S12 2284 5 PSI 182004
C5G-825-S12 Plug ‘‘O’’ Ring Model
C2G-825-S17 14137 Y154077 C2G/C3G/C4G
C3G/C4G-825-S17 64062 125 PSI
347831 Y161467 C5G
C5G-825-S17 Torque plug to 40-50 lb.ft. (54-68 N.m)
C2G-825-S19
C3G/C4G-825-S19 106669 20 PSI
C5G-825-S19 108359
C2G-825-S20 C3G/C4G/C5G-825
C3G/C4G-825-S20 2950 1 PSI YSeal Kits
C5G-825-S20 Standard 919381
C5G-825-S44 64062 125 PSI F3 919382
For satisfactory service life of these components, use full flow filtration to provide fluid which meets ISO cleanliness code 16/13
or cleaner. Selections from pressure, return, and in-line filter series are recommended.
 Eaton Hydraulics, Incorporated 2000 Printed in U.S.A.

All Rights Reserved
–2–
VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES


Vickers®
Service Data
Check Valves
Inline Check Valve
DT8P1-10/-11
DS8P1-10/-11
Body sold as an assembly only.

Order by model number.
Cracking
Retaining Pipe
Washer Spring Poppet Sleeve Ball Pressure Model
Ring Size
PSI
113559 5 DT8P1-02-5-10
92733 113714 216999 113715 1651 1/4 30 DT8P1-02-30-10
114094 65 DT8P1-02-65-10
123761 5 D*8P1-03-5-10
106642 123740 217000 123737 3/8 30 DT8P1-03-30-10
123760 65 D*8P1-03-65-10
125779 5 D*8P1-06-5-11
222541 15 D*8P1-06-15-11
418556 20 DT8P1-06-20-11
98702 125673 216998 125674 3/4 30 D*8P1-06-30-11
425262 40 DT8P1-06-40-11
580963 50 DT8P1-06-50-11
125780 65 D*8P1-06-65-11
125631 5 D*8P1-10-5-11
312094 15 DT8P1-10-15-11
216548 30 DT8P1-10-30-11
113752 125635 125634 1-1/4
257354 50 DT8P1-10-50-11
125632 65 D*8P1-10-65-11
582338 95 DT8P1-10-95-11
Revised 5-1-85 I-953-S

Model Code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 Model Series 4 Spool Action 7 Cracking Pressure

Directional control P- Poppet 5- 5 PSI
15 - 15 PSI
20 - 20 PSI
2 Mounting Connection 5 Flow Direction 30 - 30 PSI
S- Straight threaded 1- One way flow 35 - 35 PSI
T- Pipe threaded 40 - 40 PSI
50 - 50 PSI
6 Valve Size Series 65 - 65 PSI
3 Valve Type 95 - 95 PSI
02 - 1/4 inch
8- Inline 03 - 3/8 inch
06 - 3/4 inch 8 Design
10 - 1-1/4 inch
For satisfactory service life of these components, use full flow filtration to provide fluid which meets ISO cleanliness code 16/13
or cleaner. Selections from pressure, return, and in-line filter series are recommended.
–2–
VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES


Válvulas antirretorno
Válvulas antirretorno pilotadas tipo RH y DRH

Las válvulas antirretorno con pilotaje hidráulico tipo RH y DRH pertene- Tipo válvula: Válvula antirretorno con
cen al grupo de las válvulas para montaje en línea. Sirven para el cierre pilotaje hidráulico
de una o ambas líneas del actuador hidráulico asi como válvula de purga
o de circulación con accionamiento hidráulico. Las válvulas RH y DRH Versión: Válvula simple para
están disponibles también con decompresión para uno o ambos lados conexión en línea
del circuito y sirve para en el caso de actuadores de elevada presión y Válvula montaje
volúmen para suprimir los golpes de ariete. en línea
La variante del tipo DRH para montaje en línea con válvulas de choque,
válvulas limitadoras de presión contra aumentos lentos de la presión y/o Accionamiento: hidráulico
toma para fugas de aceite contra un desbloqueo no intencionado por
efecto de presiones, abren un extenso pmáx.: 700...400 bar
espectro de aplicaciones.
Qmáx.: 15...160 l/min
Tipos básicos y principales parámetros

Tipo básico Caudal Presión trabajo Relación pilotaje Conexiones Símbolo hidráulico
y tamaño Qmáx. (l/min) pmáx. (bar)
pA(B) / pZ A, B, C, D Z
RH 1 15 700 2,7 G 1/4

RH 2 35 700 3 G 3/8
RH 3 55 500 2,4 G 1/2 G 1/4
RH 4 100 500 2,4 G 3/4
RH 5 160 500 3 G1
DRH 1 16 500 2,5 G 1/4
DRH 2 30 500 2,5 G 3/8
2 DRH 3 60 500 2,5 G 1/2 --
5 DRH 4 90 400 2,5 G 3/4

DRH 5 140 400 2,5 G1
Otras versiones
• Válvulas antirretorno pilotadas con descompresión tipo RH.V • Válvulas antirretorno dobles pilotadas como válvula para montaje
• Válvulas antirretorno dobles pilotadas con válvula de choque para sobre placa tipo DRH3P
motores hidráulicos así como con protección contra aumentos lentos • Válvulas antirretorno dobles pilotadas con drenaje contra desbloqueo al
de la presión penetrar la presión en el lado de pilotaje
Ejemplos de pedido
RH 2 DRH 1
Válvula antirretorno pilotada tipo RH, tamaño 2 Válvula antirretorno pilotada (válvula gemela) tipo DRH, tamaño 1
2.5-14 2003
Válvulas antirretorno pilotadas
Dimensiones
Tipo RH.. Tipo DRH..
¡Todas las medidas en mm, reservado el

derecho a introducir modificaciones!
Tipo básico L a b SW m (kg) Tipo básico L B H c m (kg)

RH 1 84 31,5 27 SW 24 0,4 DRH 1 70 45 20 8 0,5
RH 2 90 32 28,5 SW 27 0,4 DRH 2 89 60 30 10 1,2
RH 3 100 36,5 31 SW 32 0,6 DRH 3 115 60 30 13 1,6
RH 4 126 45 35,5 SW 41 1,3 DRH 4 150 70 40 15,5 2,9
RH 5 143 52 38 SW 46 1,8 DRH 5 195 80 50 17 5,5
Información adicional
• Válvulas antirretorno pilotadas tipo RH D 6105 • Véase además el capítulo “Válvulas para aplicaciones especiales”
• Válvulas antirretorno dobles pilotadas tipo DRH D 6110 (Válvulas hasta 700 bar)
• Válvulas antirretorno pilotadas tipo RHV D 3056
tipo RHC D 7165 Los capítulos y páginas correspondientes a las válvulas adicionales
tipo HRP D 5116 señaladas aparecen en el índice de tipos
tipo CRH D 7712
2003 2.5-15
VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES


Vickers™
Ventiles
SystemStak
Pilot Operated Check Valves
Entsperrbare Rückschlagventile
Clapets anti-retour pilotés
Valvole di ritegno pilotate
DGM PC - 3 - (D) - ** * - (D) (BA * ) - 40

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1
SystemStak Valve 1 SystemStak Ventil 1
Appareil SystemStak 1 Valvola Systemstak
Manifold or Subplate Mounted Block oder AnschlußplattenmonĆ Montage sur bloc foré ou plaque Montaggio a blocchi o a
tage de base piastra
2 Pilot Operated Check
2 Entsperrbares RückschlĆ 2 Clapet piloté 2 Ritegno pilotate
3 agentil
Interface
3 3 Interfacci
3 - ISO 4401-3 Plan de pose
3 Anschlußbild
4 3 - ISO 4401-3 3 - ISO 4401-3
Decompression Option 3 - ISO 4401-3
4 Décompression 4 Opzione di decompres-
D - Decompression poppet 4 Vorentlastung sione
Omit - STD. pilot operated check D - avec cÔne de décompresĆ
D - Mit Vorentalstungs kegel D - otturatore di decompressione
5 sion
Check Control Entfällt bei Standard aus Vuoto - ritegno pilotato standard
Omis - clapet piloté standard
AB - Check in line A, piloted from führung 5 Controllo ritegno
5 Implantation du clapet
line B (single or dual) 5 Rückschlag funktion
BA - Check in line B, piloted from AB - ritegno nella linea A, pilotato
AB - dans la ligne B, pilotage
line A (single) AB - Ventil in Leitung A, dalla linea B (singolo o doppio)
depuis la ligne B (modèles simĆ BA - ritegno nella linea B, pilotato
steuerung von B (Einzel oder ples ou doubles)
6 Cracking Pressure dalla linea A (singolo)
Doppel) BA - dans la ligne B, pilotage
K - 1.0 bar (14 psi) BA - Ventil in Leitung B, depuis la ligne A (modèles simĆ 6 Pressione di apertura
M - 2.5 bar (36 psi) steuerung von A (Einzel) ples)
N - 5.0 bar (72 psi) 6 K - 1.0 bar (14 psi)
Öffnungsdruck 6 Pression d ' ouverture M - 2.5 bar (36 psi)
7 Decompression Option K - 1.0 bar (14 psi) N - 5.0 bar (72 psi)
K - 1,0 bar (14 psi)
D - Decompression poppet M - 2.5 bar (36 psi) M - 2,5 bar (36 psi) 7 Opzione di decompres-
Omit - STD. pilot operated check N - 5.0 bar (72 psi) N - 5,0 bar (72 psi) sione
8 Check Control
7 Vorentlastung 7 Décompression D - otturatore di decompressione
Vuoto - ritegno pilotato standard
BA - Check in line B, piloted from D - Mit Vorentalstungs kegel D - avec cÔne de décompresĆ
line A (dual) Entfällt bei Standard aus sion 8 Controllo ritegno
führung Omis - clapet piloté standard
9 Cracking Pressure BA - ritegno nella linea B, pilotato
8 Rückschlag funktion 8 Implantation du clapet dalla linea A (doppio)
K - 1.0 bar (14 psi)
M - 2.5 bar (36 psi) BA - Ventil in Leitung B, BA - dans la ligne B, pilotage 9 Pressione di apertura
N - 5.0 bar (72 psi) steuerung von A (Doppel) depuis la ligne A (modèles K - 1.0 bar (14 psi)
10 9 Öffnungsdruck doubles) M - 2.5 bar (36 psi)
Design
9 Pression d ' ouverture N - 5.0 bar (72 psi)
K - 1.0 bar (14 psi)
M - 2.5 bar (36 psi) K - 1,0 bar (14 psi) 10 Serie
N - 5.0 bar (72 psi) M - 2,5 bar (36 psi)
10 N - 5,0 bar (72 psi)
Seriennummer
10 Numéro de dessin
All repairs must be made in Alle reparaturen müssen in einer Toutes les réparations doivent Le riparazioni devono essere
clean conditions and by clean sauberen Umegebung durchgeĆ être faites dans des conditions effettuate in ambiente pulito per
practices compatible with subĆ führt werden. Die Hydraulik flüsĆ saines et par des moyens proĆ consentire un regolare funzioĆ
sequent efficient operations of sigkeit nach ISO 4406 sollte eiĆ pres compatibles avec le foncĆ namento dei componenti dei siĆ
the unit in systems having oil to nem Reinheitsgrad von 18/14 tionnement correct de l'appareil stemi idraulici che utilizzano oli
ISO 4406 grade 18/14 or cleanĆ oder besser entsprechen. dans un système utilisant de l ' con profilo di contaminazione di
er. huile de pureté égale ou supéĆ 18/14 o superiore conforme alle
rieure à la norme ISO 4406; norme ISO 4406.
18/14.
Released 10-1-90 Seriennummer I-3765-G
1
Item Torque values
Pos. Anziehmoment
1
35-40 Nm. (310-354 lb.in.)
16
6
7
12
11
C
6
15
G
P
A
3
2 10 B T
16
9
8
5 14
13
4
3
2
1
A
2
F
7
H
6
16
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
Item Model designation

Pos. Typenbezeichnung
Rep. Code de désignation
Pos. Codice di identificazione
A&B&C&D DGMPC-3-AB*-BA*
B&D&G DGMPC-3-AB*
A&C&H DGMPC-3-BA*
A&B&E&F DGMPC-3-DAB*-DBA*
B&F&G DGMPC-3-DAB*
A&E&H DGMPC-3-DBA*
3
Item Part no.
Pos. Teile-Nr.
Rep. Nde pièce
1 694104 Plug Stopfen Bouchon Tappo
2 694271 Back-up Ring Stützring Bague anti-extrusion Anello antiestrusione
4 694107 Insert Distanzring Entretoise Inserto
5 694219 Spring (K) Feder (K) Ressort (K) Molla (K)
5 694220 Spring (M) Feder (M) Ressort (M) Molla (M)
5 694221 Spring (N) Feder (N) Ressort (N) Molla (N)
6 694101 Poppet (K/M/N) Kegel (K/M/N) Cône (K/M/N) Otturatore (K/M/N)
6 694250 Poppet (D) Kegel (D) Cône (D) Otturatore (D)
7 694248 Poppet (D**K) Kegel (D**K) Cône (D**K) Otturatore (D**K)
7 694251 Poppet (D**M/N) Kegel (D**M/N) Cône (D**M/N) Otturatore (D**M/N)
8 695105 Seat Kegelsitz SIège Sede
10 694102 Piston Kolben Piston Pistone
10 694249 Piston (D) Kolben (D) Piston (D) Pistone (D)
12 ------ Nameplate Typenschild Plaque signalétique Piastrina
13 262332 (4) O-Ring O-Ring Joint torique O-Ring
14 472553 Pin (3 x 6mm.) Stift (3 x 6mm.) Pion de positionnement (3 x 6mm) Spina (3 x 6mm)
15 694106 Body Gehäuse Corps Corpo
16 694103 Plug Stopfen Bouchon Tappo
Not available for sale. Nicht als Ersatztei Non disponible séparément. Non in vendita singolarmente
erhältlich.
Available in seal kit 870708 Compris dans la pochette Disponibile in kit di
Im Dichtungsatz 870708 de joints 870708. guarnizioni 870708
In S/A 02-108631 enthalten.
Compris dans le sous-enĆ In kit 02-108631
In S/A 02-108630 Im Bausatz 02-108631 semble 02-108631
enthalten. In kit 02-108630
In S/A 02-108632 Compris dans le sous-enĆ
Im Bausatz 02-108630 semble 02-108630 In kit 02-108632
Available only in kits of 10 pieces. enthalten.
Compris dans le sous-enĆ Dispohible in kit da 10 pezzi
Im Bausatz 02-108632 semble 02-108632
enthalten.
Disponibles uniquement en kit
Nur lieferbar in de 10 ressorts
10
einheiten
P. O. Box 302
Troy, Michigan 48007-0302
U.S.A.
The right to modifications for technical improvements is reserved. Printed in U.S.A.
4
VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES


VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES


I-3886-S
™
Vickers 05-24-2001
Valves
DG4V-3(S)-***(L)-*-(V)-M-(S*)******(L)-* 60
Directional Control Valve
350 Bar (5075psi) P, A, & B Ports
®
DG4V–3(S)–*A(L)/B(L)–FJ/FW–60 CORE
Spring offset/Spring centered MODEL KNOB
TUBE S/A
A B DG4V–3–AC 508113 508111
DG4V–3–DC 508113 508124
DG4V–3S–AC 694274 890246
P T DG4V–3S–DC 694272 694323
Single solenoid valves, solenoid at “A”
port end. Transient condition only.
A B NOTE
Right hand assembly shown, for left hand
P T assembly all parts reversed except body
Single solenoid valves, solenoid at “B” (& spool on “B” builds) and electrical
port end. Transient condition only. connectors (where applicable).

02–113349 Screw(4 Req’d)
Nameplate (see table)

890333 Cover
890332 Gasket
890330 Strap
890341 Terminal box (W builds)

890342 Terminal box (J builds)
890332 Gasket
576915 Screw (ground)
507334 Body (flying lead) shown 507724 Plug AC

507731 Body (Din) 507908 Plug DC
262342 “O” Ring 262342 “O” Ring
Spool (see table)
458458 Washer DC (2 Req’d)
(8B builds AC or DC)
Spring (2 Req’d)
Push Pin
(included in Core Tube S/A see table)
262353 “O” Ring
Core Tube S/A (see table)
472553 Pin
262332 “O” Ring (4 Req’d)
Orfice Plug (see table)
617605 Washer AC (2 Req’d)

Available in seal kit only
Coil (See Table)
Available in spool accessory kit
262392 “O” Ring
(see table)
Knob (see table) Available in mounting kit 893236 only
DIN Coil (See Table) Available in qty’s. of 25 or more only
Not available for sale

Torque 44–62 lbf. ft.(5,0–7,0 N.m)
Torque 18–25 lbf. in.(2,3–2,8 N.m)
Torque 22–27 lbf. ft.(30–36 N.m)
Torque 21–26 lbf. in.(2.5–3.0 N.m)
CORE DG4V–3(S)–*C–FJ/FW–60
MODEL KNOB TUBE S/A Spring centered
A B
DG4V–3–AC 508113 508111
DG4V–3–DC 508113 508124
DG4V–3S–AC 694274 890246 P T
DG4V–3S–DC 694272 694323 Double solenoid valves, spring centered
Transient condition only.
Nameplate
02–113349 Screw(4 Req’d)
(see table)
890333 Cover
890332 Gasket
890330 Strap
36212 Screw (2 Req’d) DIN Coil (See Table)
473710 Screw
(2 Req’d)

890332 Gasket
507334 Body (flying lead) shown

507731 Body (Din)
NOTE
Refer to other end of valve for common
part numbers.
472553 Roll Pin

262332 “O” Ring (4 Req’d)
262342 “O” Ring
DIN Coil (See Table)
458458 Washer DC
(8C builds AC or DC)
Spool (see table)
617605 Washer AC
Spring
262353 “O” Ring
Push Pin (included in CoreTube S/A)

(see table)
Available in mounting kit 893236 only
Coil (See Table) Available in qty’s. of 25 or more only
262392 “O” Ring Not available for sale
Knob (see table)
Torque 44–62 lbf. ft.(5,0–7,0 N.m)
Torque 18–25 lbf. in.(2,3–2,8 N.m)
Torque 21–26 lbf. in.(2.5–3.0 N.m)
DG4V–3(S)–*N–FJ/FW–60 CORE
MODEL KNOB
No spring detented TUBE S/A
A B DG4V–3–AC 508113 508111
DG4V–3–DC 508113 508124
DG4V–3S–AC 694274 890246
DG4V–3S–DC 694272 694323
P T
Double solenoid valves, two position,
detented. Transient condition only.

02–113349 Screw(4 Req’d)
Nameplate
(see table)
890333 Cover
890332 Gasket
890330 Strap
36212 DIN Coil (See Table)
Screw (2 Req’d)
473710 Screw
(2 Req’d)

890332 Gasket

507334 Body (flying lead) shown
507731 Body (Din)
NOTE
Refer to other end
of valve for
common part
numbers.
472553 Roll Pin
262332 “O” Ring (4 Req’d)
262342 “O” Ring
DIN Coil (See Table)
Spool (see table)

Detent kit

262353 “O” Ring

(see table)
Available in mounting kit 893236 only
262392 “O” Ring
Torque 44–62 lbf. ft.(5,0–7,0 N.m)
Knob (see table) Torque 18–25 lbf. in.(2,3–2,8 N.m)
Torque 21–26 lbf. in.(2.5–3.0 N.m)
CORE DG4V–3(S)–*A(L)/B(L)–S3/S4–FJ/FW–60
MODEL KNOB
TUBE S/A Switch option
DG4V–3–AC 508113 508111
DG4V–3–DC 508113 508124 A B
DG4V–3S–AC 694274 890246
DG4V–3S–DC 694272 694323
P T
LIMIT SWITCH ADJUSTMENT Single solenoid valves, solenoid at “A”
NOTE Remove cover and energize solenoid.
Loosen switch retaining screws and A B
Right hand assembly shown, for left hand position switch to obtain complete circuit
assembly all parts reversed except body (& from common (C) thru normally open (NO)
spool on “B” builds) and electrical connectors contacts. De–energize solenoid and make
(where applicable). P T
sure switch returns to normally open (NO)
Single solenoid valves, solenoid at “B”
position before re–installing cover.

470708 Washer (2 Req’d)
Refer to 267902 Screw (2 Req’d)
AL/BL–60 for Knob (see table)
989756 Bracket
part & kit 262392 “O” Ring
989591 Pad
numbers
866040 Switch
S/A
6450 Washer
(2 Req’d)
1453 Nut
(2 Req’d)
698402 Housing
989755 Push Pin
698430 Gasket
507334 Body
698401 Switch Mount
262353 “O” Ring
262325 “O” Ring
676281 Spacer
508199 Spring
698400 Hat
472553 Roll Pin

262332 “O” Ring (4 Req’d)
262342 “O” Ring
Spool (see table)

458458 Washer DC
Spring
262353 “O” Ring
617605 Washer AC

(see table)
Available in limit switch kit 892951 only
262392 “O” Ring Torque 22–27 lbf. ft.(30–36 N.m)
Knob (see table) Torque 21–26 lbf. in.(2.5–3.0 N.m)
BLANK NAMEPLATES (DG4V-3S-60 STANDARD VALVE) Spool accessory kits
These kits contain the correct centering
MODEL CODE NAMEPLATE
washers, centering springs, and seal kit to
service or convert all valve build types.
DG4V-3S-***-**-M-U-**60 694302
Some extra parts may exist after service
DG4V-3S-***-**-M-F/FP A3/FPA5-**-60 694386
or conversion (seals, spring, etc). Spool
DG4V-3S-***-**-M-FPB-**-60 694363
not included in kit and must be ordered
DG4V-3S-***-**-M-FPBL-**-60 694362
separately.
DG4V-3S-AC/DC 893240
all spools, all builds, except detent
builds
BLANK NAMEPLATES (DG4V-3-60 HIGH PERFORMANCE VALVE) DG4V-3S-AC 893242
all spools,detent builds only
MODEL CODE NAMEPLATE DG4V-3S-DC 893243
all spools,detent builds only
DG4V-3-***-**-M-(S*)-U-*7-60 694303 DG4V-3-AC 893238
DG4V-3-***-**-M-(S*)-U-*2/*6-60 694451 all spools, all builds, except 8B/8C, or
DG4V-3-***-**-M-(S*)-F/FP A3/FPA5-*7-60 694387 detent builds
DG4V-3-***-**-M-FPB-**-60 865929 DG4V-3-AC 893239
DG4V-3-***-**-M-FPBL-**-60 865930 8B/8C builds only
DG4V-3-AC/DC 893242
all spools, detent builds only
NOTE DG4V-3-DC 893239
Use blank nameplates when converting all spools, all builds, except detent
to other valve configurations. Model DG4V-3L-DC 893239
number, assembly number, coil all spools, low power only
designator, tank pressure, and graphic DG4V-3L-AC 893241
symbol must be imprinted by person all spools, all builds, low power only,
performing conversion. except 8B/8C
DG4V-3L-AC 893239
RESTRICTOR PLUG low power, 8B/8C only
Install In P,T,A, Or B As Required
CODE ORIFICE DIA. PART #
03 0,30 (0.012) 694341
06 0,60 (0.024) 694342
08 0,80 (0.030) 694343
10 1,00 (0.040) 694344
13 1,30 (0.050) 694345
15 1,50 (0.060) 694346
20 2,00 (0.080) 694347
23 2,30 (0.090) 694348
CAUTION
There is no coil/coretube/part
interchangeability between the -60
design and the previous design valves.
Seal kits
Seal kit 858996 for (F type coil)
Seal kit 858995 for (U type coil)
Seal kit 859049 for (MS spool
position monitor switch
Bolt spacer kit 893225 (spacers required

when using -40 design bolts to mount a
-60 design valve)
NOTE
For satisfactory service life of these
components in industrial applications, use
full flow filtration to provide fluid which
meets ISO 4406 cleanliness code 20/16 Construction of a typical single solenoid model
for up to 200 bar (3000 psi) and 18/14 for
above 200 bar (3000 psi) or cleaner.
Information contained in this catalog is accurate as of the publication date and is subject to
change without notice. Performance values are typical values. Customers are responsible for
selecting products for their applications using normal engineering methods.
Eaton Hydraulics
14615 Lone Oak Road 46 New Lane, Havant
Eden Prairie, MN 55344-2287 Hampshire PO9 2NB
Telephone: (888) 258-0222 England
Fax: (952) 974-7722 Telephone: (44) 23 92 486 451
www.eatonhydraulics.com Fax: (44) 23 92 487 110
Copyright Eaton Corporation, 2001

11-06-608 All rights reserved.
EN-0300
Form No. 00-000 Printed
Copyright in U.S.A
Eaton Corporation, 0000
All rights reserved.
Printed in U.S.A
VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES


Vickers®
Directional Controls
Wet Armature Solenoid Operated Directional

Control Valves
Model DG4V-5, 20 Series
Typical Construction of a
Spring-Centered DC Valve with
Variable Speed Pilot Control passage
Speed control orifice plug, optional.

See model code description
General Description
Max. pressure . . . . . . 315 bar (4500 psi)
Max. flow rates . . . . . . . Up to 120 L/min
(32 USgpm),
dependent on spool
Mounting surface . . . . ISO 4401 size 05
NFPA D02
DIN 24340 (NG10)
A range of four-port solenoid operated

directional control valves with four-land
spool design to facilitate provision of
smooth, variable valve response
speeds.
The range includes:
F AC and DC wet-armature solenoid
options with ISO 4400 (DIN 43650)
electrical connections and manual
overrides.
F Variable speed changeover potential
in all DC models; see “Response
Times” section
F Many spool types; in spring-offset,
spring-centered and detented
arrangements. 5069.00/EN/0497/A
A.1
Functional Symbols
Double Solenoid Valves, Single Solenoid Valves, Single Solenoid Valves,

Two-Position, Detented Solenoid at Port A End Solenoid at Port B End
AB AB A B
Y Y Y
Sol. B Sol. A Sol. B Sol. A
P T PT P TJ
DG4V-5-*N valves DG4V-5-*A valves DG4V-5-*AL valves
2 0 0
6 2 2
Double Solenoid Valves,

Spring Centered 22 22
AB
Y Y 23 23
Sol. B P TJ Sol. A
DG4V-5-*C valves DG4V-5-*B valves DG4V-5-*BL valves
0 0 0
1 1 1
2 2 2
3 3 3
6 6 6
7 7 7
8 8 8
11 11 11
31 31
33 33 31
34 34
33
52 34
56 52
521 521 56
561 561
Y Transient condition only.

J Both ports TA and TB are available.
A.2
Model Code
(F13-) DG4V-5-*** *(L) (J) (-**)- (V) M- (S6)- U - ** 6- 20- J**
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 Prefix, fluid compatibility 6 Solenoid energization identity For Mounting Subplates and Fixing
Blank = AC or DC-voltage models for V = Solenoid “A” is at port A end Bolt Kits
petroleum oils, water-in-oil and/or solenoid “B” is at port B See catalogs 2425 and 2314.
(invert) emulsions or end, independent of spool type
For Electrical Plug(s)
phosphate esters. Omit for US ANSI B93.9 standard
See end of “Installation Dimensions”
AC-voltage models for water requiring solenoid “A” to connect P to A
section.
glycols. when energized and/or solenoid “B” to
F13 = DC-voltage models for water connect P to B
glycols.
Operating Data
7 Spool position indicator switch Max. Pressures
2 Spool type Ports P, A and B . . . . 315 bar (4500 psi)
S6 - LVDT type DC switch with Pg7
Ports TA and TB . . . . 120 bar (1750 psi)
See “Functional Symbols” section connector plug
for AC sol.
160 bar (2325 psi)
3 Spool spring arrangement 8 Electrical connection(s) for DC sol.
A = Spring-offset, end-to-end U = ISO 4400 (DIN 43650)
AL = As “A” but left-hand build mounting(s) without plug(s) Control Data
B = Spring offset, end-to-center
BL = As “B” but left-hand build 9 Coil rating For coil ratings see 8 in “Model Code”
C = Spring centered section.
A = 110V AC 50
N = Two-position, detented C = 220V AC 50 Power Consumption
See also “Functional Symbols” section ED = 240V AC 50 AC Solenoids
EK = 115V AC 60
4 Spool design EH = 230V AC 60 AC AC
J = All DC valves except “0A” G = 12V DC 50 Hz 60 Hz
spool/spring arrangements. H = 24V DC Inrush, max. YVA 700 750
AC valves with “8B(L)” and “8C” HL = 24V DC (32W) Steady-state BVA 375 440
spool/spring arrangements. OJ = 48V DC Holding VA 105 130
Omit for “0A” DC-valves and all AC P = 110V DC
valves except “8B(L)” and “8C” All above values are RMS
spool/spring arrangements Y Armature fully retracted, 1st half-cycle.
10 Design number, 20 series B At start of normal working stroke of valve
Subject to change. Installation spool. Previously called “Inrush”.
5 Manual override option dimensions unaltered for design
P = Standard overrides in both ends numbers 20 to 29 inclusive DC Solenoids
of single-solenoid valves At rated voltage and wire temperature of
H = Water-resistant override(s) in 20_C (68_F):
11 Spool speed control
solenoid end(s)B Type HL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32W
J06 = 0,6 mm orifice Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-42W
H2 = Water-resistant overrides in both J08 = 0,8 mm orifice
ends of single-solenoid valves J10 = 1,0 mm orifice
Z = No overrides at either end J12 = 1,2 mm orifice
Omit for standard plain override(s) in J99 = no orifice. Must be specified
solenoid end(s) onlyB where future fitting of orifice is required,
B No override in non-solenoid end of see page A.11, “Spool Speed Control
single-solenoid valves.
Orifice”
A.3
Operating Data
Spool Position Indicator Models

Spool/spring arrangement types 0A (L), 2A(L), 22A(L)
DC model type “S6”
This product has been designed and tested to meet specific standards outlined in the European Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive (EMC) 89/336/EEC, amended by 91/263/EEC, 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC, article 5. For instructions on installation
requirements to achieve effective protection levels see this leaflet and the Installation Wiring Practices for Vickers Electronic
Products leaflet 2468. Wiring practices relevant to this Directive are indicated by
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) .
Input:
Supply voltage 10 to 35V DC inclusive of a maximum 4V pk-to-pk ripple
Current, switch open 5 mA
Current, switch closed 255 mA
Output:
Voltage 1V below input at maximum load
Maximum continuous current 250 mA
Maximum load impedance 136Ω at maximum input volts
Maximum switching frequency 10 Hz
Plug connections:
Pin 1 (output 1) Normally open (ie. not connected to pin 3)
Pin 2 Supply +ve
Pin 3 0V
Pin 4 (output 2) Normally closed (ie. connected to pin 3)
Switching point Within the spool spring offset condition D
Connector Pg7 plug (supplied with valve)
Protection Overload and short-circuit protected; self re-setting.
IEC 144 class IP65 with connector correctly fitted.
D Factory setting ensures this condition under all combinations of manufacturing tolerance and of temperature drift (see “Temperature Limits”) .
Wiring Connections Warning

All power must be switched off before
connecting or disconnecting any plugs.
Electrical
Panel
LVDT Solenoid
Customer’s protective ground connection

WARNING: Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
It is necessary to ensure that the unit is wired up in accordance with the connection arrangements shown above. For
effective protection the user’s electrical cabinet, the valve subplate or manifold and the cable screens should be
connected to efficient ground points.
In all cases both valve and cable should be kept as far away as possible from any sources of electromagnetic
radiation such as cables carrying heavy current, relays and certain kinds of portable radio transmitters, etc. Difficult
environments could mean that extra screening may be necessary to avoid the interference.
A.5
Response Times, Typical For synthetic fluids consult manufacturer
Time taken from when signal is first or Vickers where limits are outside those
applied at the solenoid until the spool for petroleum oil.
completes its travel. Based on
DG4V-5-2C at 60 L/min (16 USgpm) Whatever the actual temperature range,
from P to A to B to T and at 160 bar ensure that viscosities stay within the
(2320 psi) with petroleum oil at 36 cSt limits specified in the “Hydraulic Fluids”
(168 SUS) and at 50_C (122_F): section.
AC energizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 ms Solenoid Surface Temperatures
AC de-energizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 ms Typical maximums at 20_C (68_F)
DC energizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 msY ambient:
DC de-energizing . . . . . . . . . . 45 msY: AC 50 Hz solenoids . . . . . 80_C (176_F)
: In pure switched conditions, devoid of the AC 60 Hz solenoids . . . . . 92_C (197_F)
efffects of any suppression diodes and
full-wave rectifiers.
DC solenoids . . . . . . . . . . 78_C (172_F)
Y DG4V-5-2CJ valves. Longer response
times can be obtained by fitting an orifice
Contamination Control Requirements
plug in a special pilot port, standard in all Recommendations on contamination
bodies. An orifice kit 459065, containing a control methods and the selection of
selection of plugs of differing orifice size, products to control fluid condition are
can be ordered separately. Ask your
included in Vickers publication 9132 or
Vickers representative for details.
561, “Vickers Guide to Systemic
Hydraulic Fluids Contamination Control”. The book also
Water glycols can be used with includes information on the Vickers
F13-prefix DC-voltage models or with concept of “ProActive Maintenance”.
non-prefix AC-voltage models. The following recommendations are
Non-prefix DC-voltage models and all based on ISO cleanliness levels at
AC-voltage models can be used with 2 mm, 5 mm and 15 mm. For products in
anti-wear hydraulic oils, water-in-oil this catalog the recommended levels
emulsions, phosphate esters (not alkyl are:
based).
Up to 210 bar (3050 psi) . . . . . 20/18/15
The extreme operating viscosity range is Above 210 bar (3050 psi) . . . . 19/17/14
from 500 to 13 cSt (2300 to 70 SUS) but
Mass, Approx. kg (lb)
the recommended running range is 54 to
Single solenoid models,
13 cSt (245 to 70 SUS).
AC coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,0 (8.8)
For further information about fluids see Single solenoid models,
catalog 920. DC coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,8 (10.6)
Double solenoid models,
Temperature Limits AC coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,5 (9.9)
Minimum ambient . . . . . . . –20_C (–4_F) Double solenoid models,
Maximum ambient: DC coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6,3 (13.9)
AC 50 Hz valves . . . . . . 50_C (122_F)
AC 60 Hz valves . . . . . . 40_C (104_F)
DC valves . . . . . . . . . . . . 70_C (158_F)
Fluid temperatures
Petroleum Water-
oil containing
Min. –20_C +10_C
(–4_F) (+50_F)
Max.* +70_C +54_C
(+158_F) (+130_F)
* To obtain optimum service life from both
fluid and hydraulic system, 65_C (150_F)
normally is the maximum temperature
except for water-containing fluids.
A.7
Installation Dimensions in mm (inches)
AC Solenoid Models 3rd angle

projection
See “Electrical plugs” table below z
67 (2.6) 67 (2.6)
13 (0.5) for plug removal
115 (4.53) Y
80
(3.15) 74,0
(2.91)
36 (1.4) 30
(1.18)
Ports
A&BC A B
Fixing 75 (2.95) 75 (2.95)

C D
bolt C for coil for coil
removal E removal
71 (2.8) F
AC models G
Y May vary according to plug source.

z The cable entry can be repositioned at 90_
intervals from the position shown.
This is done by reassembling the contact
holder into the appropriate position inside
the plug housing.
Model Solenoid at: C D E F G

Port A end 123 (4.84) – – 182 (7.17) –
DG4V-5-*A(L)/B(L)(-Z)-(V)M
Port B end – 123 (4.84) 182 (7.17) – –
Port A end 138 (5.43) – – 223 (8.78) –
DG4V-5-*A(L)/B(L)-H2-(V)M
Port B end – 138 (5.43) 223 (8.78) – –
Port A end 123 (4.84) – – 195 (7.68) –
DG4V-5-*A(L)/B(L)-P-(V)M
Port B end – 123 (4.84) 195 (7.68) – –
DG4V-5-*C/N(-Z)-(V)M Both ends 123 (4.84) 123 (4.84) – – 246 (9.68)
DG4V-5-*C/N-H-(V)M Both ends 138 (5.43) 138 (5.43) – – 276 (10.87)
A.8
3rd angle
DC Solenoid Models projection
See “Electrical plugs” table below z
101 (4.0) 101 (4.0)

13 (0.5) for plug removal
113 (4.45) Y
78
(3.1)
30
(1.18)
Ports A B
A&BC 36 (1.4)
Fixing 110 (4.33) 110 (4.33)
C D
bolt C for coil for coil
removal E removal
70 (2.76) F
DC models G
Y May vary according to plug source.

z The cable entry can be repositioned at 90_
intervals from the position shown.
This is done by reassembling the contact
holder into the appropriate position inside
the plug housing.
Model Solenoid at: C D E F G

Port A end 156 (6.14) – – 215 (8.46) –
DG4V-5-*A(L)/B(L)-(-Z)-(V)M
Port B end – 156 (6.14) 215 (8.46) – –
Port A end 185 (7.28) – – 270 (10.63) –
DG4V-5-*A(L)/B(L)-H2-(V)M
Port B end – 185 (7.28) 270 (10.63) – –
Port A end 156 (6.14) – – 228 (8.98) –
DG4V-5-*A(L)/B(L)-P-(V)M
Port B end – 156 (6.14) 228 (8.98) – –
DG4V-5-*C/N(-Z)-(V)M Both ends 156 (6.14) 156 (6.14) – – 312 (12.28)
DG4V-5-*C/N-H-(V)M Both ends 185 (7.28) 185 (7.28) – – 370 (14.57)
A.9
Model (see also 5 in Spool types Solenoid identity
“Model Codes”) Port A Port B
end end
DG4V-5-*A(J)/B(J)(-**)-M All except 8 B –
All except 8 A –
DG4V 5 *A(J)/B(J)( **) VM
DG4V-5-*A(J)/B(J)(-**)-VM
8 only – B
DG4V-5-*AL(J)/BL(J)(-**)-M All except 8 – A
All except 8 – B
DG4V-5-*AL(J)/BL(J)(-**)-VM
8 only A –
DG4V-5-*C(J)/N(J)(-**)-M All except 8 B A
DG4V-5-*C(J)/N(J)(-**)-VM All spools A B
Electrical plug(s) (without indicator light) to

DIN 43650.
Must be ordered separately by part number(s).
Part No. Color Solenoid Cable gland
/LVDT
identity
710775 Black B Pg11 Ø6-10 mm
710776 Gray A Pg11 Ø6-10 mm
458939 Gray LVDT Pg7 Ø3,5-6 mm
Spool Speed Control Orifice

For fine tuning of valve spool speed.
Only applicable to valves already fitted
with an orifice or blank plug, see model
code, page A.3.
Warning - Changing procedure

Before breaking a circuit
connection make certain that power is
off and system pressure has been
released. Lower all vertical cylinders,
discharge accumulators and block any
load whose movement could generate
pressure. Plug all removed units and
cap all lines to prevent entry of dirt into
the system.
Orifice Kit
Orifice kits must be ordered separately,
part number 02-350116.
Kit comprises 1 off each of the following:
0,6 mm dia
0,8 mm dia
1,0 mm dia
1,2 mm dia
Blank
A.11
VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES


Vickers®
Service Data
Directional Controls
Pilot Operated Directional Control Valves

DG3S-H8-*C*-*-*-20 Spring Centered
DG3S-H8-**-*-*-20 No Spring
Revised 11/01/85 I-3444-S

*Note Screw
Model (4 req’d) Bolt Kit
Assemble Type 1 and 3 spools with narrow
center land toward ‘A’ end of valve. ‘A’ end
Without Pilot Choke 473726
of valve is defined as being closest to cylin-
der port ‘‘A’’. The type 31 spool is installed With Pilot Choke 466836
in reverse of type 3, with narrow center land Kits include (4) screws
toward ‘B’ end of valve. Torque to 4.5-5.7 N.m. (39.8 - 50.4 lb. in.)
941157 Cover
I.D. Plate & Rest Pin S/A
Model Spool
‘‘C’’ No Spring
DG3S-H8-0(C)*-*-*-20 786350 400976 400975 262335 ‘‘O’’ Ring
DG3S-H8-1(C)*-*-*-20 *786557 400977 (2 req’d)
DG3S-H8-2(C)*-*-*-20 786349 400978 400975 Pilot Choke
DG3S-H8-3(C)*-*-*-20 *786558 400979 DGMFN-3-Y-A2W-B2W-21
DG3S-H8-4(C)*-*-*-20 628162 400980 (See model code page
DG3S-H8-6(C)*-*-*-20 786559 400981 400975 for parts description.)
DG3S-H8-8(C)*-*-*-20 627221 400980
DG3S-H8-9(C)*-*-*-20 786561 400976 400975
DG3S-H8-31(C)*-*-*-20 *786558 580475 262332 ‘‘O’’ Ring
(4 req’d)
DG3S-H8-33(C)*-*-*-20 786562 400981
416834 Rivet
(4 req’d)
Spool (See table)
ID Plate with circuit
diagram (See table)
786523 Washer
263492 ‘‘O’’ Ring
783665 Spring (2 req’d)
262403 ‘‘O’’ Ring 591768 Plug
(2 req’d)
573674 Cover
113000 Plug
(Does not exist on
check valve models)
237588 Orifice Plug

(For low shock mod-
els with ‘‘X’’ omitted
from model code)
262389 ‘‘O’’ Ring

470884 Screw (4 req’d) (2 req’d) (X & Y ports)
Torque 49-59 N.m.
(36-43.5 lb. ft.) Spring (See table)
Remove Spring & Washer from both 580449 Valve
ends of valve on No-Spring models.
579693 Seat
Plug torques (oiled)
262494 ‘‘O’’ Ring (4 req’d)
Plug Torque Torque (A, B, P &T ports)
(N.m.) (lb. in.)
113000 5.0 - 5.9 45-52
591768 9.8 - 10.2 87-90
591769 12.1 - 12.4 107-110 Model Spring Color
591770 15.0 - 16.6 133-147 DG3S-H8-(C)*-*-*-K-**-*-10 398130
DG3S-H8-(C)*-*-*-R-**-*-10 398131 Yellow
 Eaton Hydraulics, Incorporated 2000
All Rights Reserved DG3S-H8-(C)*-*-*-S-**-*-10 398132 Red
263492 ‘‘O’’ Ring Note
Parts included in service kits will not
591768 Plug be sold separately.
471119 Set Screw (Bond in place All threaded fasteners are metric,
with Loctitte H/S or equivalent) End cover screws are metric grade
12,9.
591769 Plug
470844 Screw (4 req’d)
263493 Torque 49-59 N.m
‘‘O’’ Ring (36-43.5 lb. ft.)
573674 Cover
263492
‘‘O’’ Ring
591768
Plug
263492 ‘‘O’’ Ring

591768 Plug
113000 Plug
262403 ‘‘O’’ Ring

783695 Spring
786523 Washer
591768 Plug (2 req’d)
263492 ‘‘O’’ Ring (2 req’d)
573675 Body (Std)
577493 Body
‘‘P’’ Port
(Check Valve)
‘‘X’’ Port
263494 ‘‘O’’ Ring

(2 req’d)
591770 Plug
(2 req’d)
591768 Plug
(3 req’d)
199312 Rest Pin (2 req’d)
263492 ‘‘O’’ Ring
(3 req’d)
Remove from both ends of
787125 Cover
Note
Parts shown included Torque 49-59 N.m.
in Stroke Adjustment (36-43.5 lb. ft.)
Included in F3 Seal Kit 920137 Kit 941156. Order two
Included in Fastener Kit 941175 kits if stroke adjust for
both ends is required.
Included in Fastener Kit 941164
Included in Plug Kit 941167 471207
Adj. Screw
470684 Nut
Used on Check Valve models only
263403 ‘‘O’’ Ring 787127 Piston
262335 ‘‘O’’ Ring 197573 Back-up Ring
531790 Needle Housing (2 req’d)
Pilot Choke Torque 65 N.m (47.9 lb. ft.)
DGMFN-3-Y-A2W-B2W-21
531435 Spring (2 req’d)
531436 Poppet (2 req’d) 531296 Nut (2 req’d)
262337 ‘‘O’’ Ring (2 req’d) 531792 Needle (2 req’d)
262328 ‘‘O’’ Ring (2 req’d)
531433 Body (Not

available for sale)
416834 Rivet (2 req’d)
920084 Seal kit
926456 Needle Valve Kit

Name Plate
262332 ‘‘O’’ Ring (4 req’d)

Suffix symbol pertains only
472553 Rollpin (2 req’d)
to Vickers Material Control.
Model Code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 Seal Material 5 Valve Type 8 Check Valve in Pressure Port

F3 - Special seals for mineral oil or fire C - Spring centered (Omit when not required.)
resistant fluid (Omit for no-spring models.) K - 0,35 bar (5 psi)
S - 5,20 bar (75 psi)
2 Model Series 6 Fast Response ‘‘X’’

9 Design
DG3S - Directional valve, subplate (Omit for standard models.)
mounted, pilot operated, rated
pressure 210 bar (3000 psi) 10 Offset to ‘‘B’’
7 Spool Control Modification
(Omit for std. offset to ‘‘A’’ models.)
3 (Omit when not required)
Interface (High Flow) 2 - Pilot choke adjustments
H8 - CETOP 8 7 - Stroke adjustment, cylinder ‘‘A’’ end
only
8 - Stroke adjustment, cyliner ‘‘B’’ end
4 Spool Type only
2-7 - If both are required
2-8 - If both are required
For satisfactory service life of these components, use full flow filtration to provide fluid which meets ISO cleanliness code
20/18/15 or cleaner. Selections from Eaton OFP,OFR and OFRS filter series are recommended. Printed in U.S.A.
VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES


VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES


Catalog 2502/USA Flow Control Valves
Technical Information Series F
General Description
Series “F” flow control valves provide precise control of
flow and shut-off in one direction, and automatically
permit full flow in the opposite direction.
Operation
A two-step needle allows fine adjustment at low flow by
using the first three turns of the adjusting knob; the
next three turn open the valve to full flow, and also
provide standard throttling adjustments.
Features
• The exclusive “Colorflow” color-band reference scale on
the valve stem is a great convenience and time-saver in
setting the valve originally and in returning it to any
previous setting.
• A simple set screw locks the valve on any desired setting.
• A tamperproof option (T) feature is also available to
prevent accidental or intentional adjustment of flow
setting.
Specifications Performance Curves

Maximum Operating Brass: 140 Bar (2000 PSI); Controlled Flow vs. Pressure Drop
Pressure except for F1600 brass Needle Full Open
PSI Bar 100 SSU, Hydraulic Oil, S.G. = 0.857
which is 35 Bar (500 PSI) 160 11.0
Steel: 345 Bar (5000 PSI) for
200 thru 1220; 140 9.7 Models 400
207 Bar (3000 PSI) for and 620 (#4) Model 200
120 8.2
all other sizes
Pressure Drop
Return Check Poppet, 100 6.8

Models 400 Models 600
G Nominal Cracking
Pressure
0.4 Bar (5 PSI) 80 5.7
and 620 and 820
60 4.1
Poppets Soft seal poppet in brass 200-
1020 sizes 40 2.7
Solid metal 416 stainless steel
poppet on all other sizes and 20 1.4
styles 0
LPM 3.8 7.6 11.4 15.1 18.9 22.7 26.5 30.3
Operating Temperature -40°C to +121°C (-40°F to +250°F) 0
GPM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Flow
Controlled Flow vs. Pressure Drop Controlled Flow vs. Pressure Drop
Needle Full Open Needle Full Open
PSI Bar 100 SSU, Hydraulic Oil, S.G. = 0.857 PSI Bar 100 SSU, Hydraulic Oil, S.G. = 0.857
160 11.0 160 11.0
140 9.7 140 9.7

Model
1620
120 8.2 120 8.2
Model 800 Model 820 Models 1600 Models 2020
Pressure Drop
Pressure Drop
and 1020 2000, 2400, and 2420

100 6.8 100 6.8
and 3200
80 5.7 80 5.7
Models 1200
and 1220
60 4.1 60 4.1
Model 1600 Model 3220
40 2.7 40 2.7
20 1.4 20 1.4
0 0
LPM 18.9 37.9 56.8 75.7 94.6 113.6 132.5 151.4 LPM 75.7 151.4 227.1 302.8 378.5 454.2 529.9 605.6
0 0
GPM 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 GPM 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Flow Flow
Parker Hannifin Corporation

Hydraulic Valve Division
Hydraulics G4 Elyria, Ohio 44035 USA
Dimensions Series F
*Inch equivalents for millimeter dimensions are shown in (**)
E
D
C
Closed
FAST
B
Open
G
G
A
F Sq. (Both Ends)
Model Max Flow
Number LPM (GPM) A B C D E F G H
F200 11 1/8–27 NPTF 39.1 35.3 50.8 32.5 16.0 7.9 19.1
(3) (1.54) (1.39) (2.00) (1.28) (0.63) (0.31) (0.75)
F400 19 1/4–18 NPTF 45.5 40.4 66.8 42.2 20.6 10.4 20.6
(5) (1.79) (1.59) (2.63) (1.66) (0.81) (0.41) (0.81)
F420 11
(3)
7/16–20 UNF
#4 SAE
41.4
(1.63)
37.6
(1.48)
68.3
(2.69)
42.9
(1.69)
20.6
(0.81)
10.4
(0.41)
19.1
(0.75)
G
F600 30 3/8–18 NPTF 55.4 49.5 69.9 44.5 25.4 12.7 25.4
(8) (2.18) (1.95) (2.75) (1.75) (1.00) (0.50) (1.00)
F620 19 9/16–18 UNF 47.7 42.7 79.2 48.8 25.4 12.7 20.6
(5) #6 SAE (1.88) (1.68) (3.12) (1.92) (1.00) (0.50) (0.81)
F800 57 1/2–14 NPTF 68.6 61.5 87.4 56.6 31.8 16.0 30.2
(15) (2.70) (2.42) (3.44) (2.23) (1.25) (0.63) (1.19)
F820 30 3/4–16 UNF 56.9 51.1 88.9 53.8 28.4 14.2 25.4
(8) #8 SAE (2.24) (2.01) (3.50) (2.12) (1.12) (0.56) (1.00)
F1020 57 7/8–14 UNF 68.6 61.5 101.6 65.0 31.8 15.7 30.2
(15) #10 SAE (2.70) (2.42) (4.00) (2.56) (1.25) (0.62) (1.19)
F1200 95 3/4–14 NPTF 85.9 71.4 98.6 65.5 38.1 19.1 35.1
(25) (3.38) (2.81) (3.88) (2.58) (1.50) (0.75) (1.38)
F1220 95 1 1/6–12 UN 85.9 71.4 117.3 76.5 38.1 19.1 35.1
(25) #12 SAE (3.38) (2.81) (4.62) (3.01) (1.50) (0.75) (1.38)
F1600 151 1–11 1/2 NPTF 123.7 106.9 127.0 81.8 44.5 22.4 47.8
(40) (4.87) (4.21) (5.00) (3.22) (1.75) (0.88) (1.88) *
F1620 151 1 5/16–12 UN 130.8 114.0 142.7 88.9 57.2 28.4 47.8
(40) #16 SAE (5.15) (4.49) (5.62) (3.50) (2.25) (1.12) (1.88) *
F2000 265 11/4–11 1/2 NPTF 130.0 113.3 143.0 98.6 57.2 28.7 47.8
(70) (5.12) (4.46) (5.63) (3.88) (2.25) (1.13) (1.88) *
F2020 265 1 5/8–12 UN 140.2 123.4 165.1 108.0 69.9 35.1 47.8
(70) #20 SAE (5.52) (4.86) (6.50) (4.25) (2.75) (1.38) (1.88) *
F2400 379 1 1/2–11 1/2 NPTF 136.4 119.6 143.0 113.5 69.9 35.1 47.8
(100) (5.37) (4.71) (5.63) (4.47) (2.75) (1.38) (1.88) *
F2420 379 1 7/8–12 UN-2B 143.5 126.7 184.2 127.0 76.2 38.1 47.8
(100) #24 SAE (5.65) (4.99) (7.25) (5.00) (3.00) (1.50) (1.88) *
F3200 568 2–11 1/2 NPTF 146.1 129.3 165.1 134.9 88.9 44.5 47.8
(150) (5.75) (5.09) (6.50) (5.31) (3.50) (1.75) (1.88) *
F3220 568 2 1/2–12 UN 163.6 139.4 228.6 155.7 101.6 50.8 47.8
(150) #32 SAE (6.44) (5.49) (9.00) (6.13) (4.00) (2.00) (1.88) *
* = Hex

Ordering Information Series F
Options Series F Size Material Needle Other Seal Design

Options Options Compound Series
Not
Code Description 200 * 800 *† 1600 * 2400 Code Description Code Description required
400 *† 820 1620 2420 for ordering
Omit Standard 420 1020 2000 3200 Omit Standard Omit Nitrile (Standard)
8 BSPT 600 *† 1200 * 2020 3220 #4 Fine Metering V Fluorocarbon
9 BSPP 620 1220 (200, 400,
* Sizes available in Brass 620 sizes)
† Sizes available in Stainless Steel
Code Description Code Description

B Brass
Omit Standard Knob
S Steel
T Tamperproof
* SS Stainless Steel
F Finger Screw
Series F Brass Valves can be
used for both air and oil service.
* Available in 400, 600 and 800
sizes.
Model Weight Model Weight

Number Kg (lbs.) Number Kg (lbs.)
F200 0.1 (0.3) F1220 1.2 (2.6)
F400 0.2 (0.5) F1600 2.3 (5.1)
F420 0.2 (0.5) F1620 2.3 (5.1)
F600 0.3 (0.7) F2000 3.7 (8.1)
F620 0.3 (0.6) F2020 3.7 (8.1)
F800 0.7 (1.5) F2400 4.6 (10.2)
F820 0.5 (1.0) F2420 4.6 (10.2)
F1020 0.8 (1.8) F3200 7.9 (17.4)
F1200 1.2 (2.6) F3220 7.9 (17.4)
G

VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES


Relief Valves
PILOT OPERATED, BALANCED PISTON
Full Adjustment 5 Turns
+ -
Flow Control Valves
FULLY ADJUSTABLE 2 NEEDLE1
c
Full Adjustment 5 Turns 2
b - +
Locating
Shoulder
Cartridge Dimensions
c Typical c Installation
b Capacity Cartridge Cavity a b Torque
1 Model Code L C K (lb. ft.)
a 12 GPM RPCC – LAN T - 162A 1.22 3/4” 2.11 2.17 2.31 25/30
2 Locating 25 GPM RPEC – LAN T - 10A 1.56 7/8” 2.00 2.06 2.25 30/35
Outlet Shoulder
50 GPM RPGC – LAN T - 3A 1.88 Cartridge2.12
1 1/8” Dimensions
2.18 2.38 45/50
Maximum Typical c Installation
100Nominal
GPM RPIC –Cartridge
LAN T - 16A
Cavity 2.44 a 1 1/4” b 2.44 2.47 2.69 150/160
Torque
Inlet 1 Orifice Model Code L H K (Nm)
a 200 GPM RPKC – LAN T - 18A 3.13 1 5/8” 2.81 2.94 3.06 350/375
4,0 mm dia. NFBC – LCN T - 162A 31 19,1 41 - 45 35/40
2
Performance Curves
Port 4,8 mm dia. NFCC – LCN T - 13A 34,9 22,2 58 64 64 40/50
RPCC RPEC 6,3 mm dia. RPGC
NFDC – LAN T - 5A RPIC
41,1 28,6 67 72RPKC
73 60/70
Port 1 9,6 mm dia. NFECTypical

– LENPressure Rise
T - 16A 61,9 31,8 73 79 79 200/215
5000 5000 14,2 mm dia. NFFC5000
– LGN T - 18A 79,4
5000 41,3 84 90 500090 465/500
4000 4000 4000 4000
P = psi
4000
P = psi
P = psi
P = psi
P = psi
Performance
3000 Curves 3000 3000 3000 3000
2000
NFBC NFCC NFDC NFEC NFFC
2000 2000 2000 2000
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
0 5 10 15 20 25 0 10 20 30 Adjustment
40 50 Sensitivity
0 20 40 at 60
7 bar
80 Differential
100 0 40 80 120 160 200 0 80 160 240 320 400
Flow = GPM Flow = GPM Flow = GPM Flow = GPM Flow = GPM
20 30 75 150 300
17 ■ Maximum operating pressure63
25
= 5000 psi 125 250
Q = L/min.
Q = L/min.
Q = L/min.
Q = L/min.
Q = L/min.
13 20 50 100 200
10 ■ Will
15 accept maximum pressure 38 at Port 2. 75 LAN
150 LEN
LGN
7 LCN 10 25 LCN 50 100

3
■ Back5 pressure on the tank port
13 (port 2)
LDN
is directly additive
25 at a 1:1 ratio to the
LBN valve
50 setting.
LFN LHN
0 1 2 3 4 ■ 5 Factory
0 1pressure
2 3 settings
4 5 established at 4 GPM
0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5
Number of Turns Number of Turns Number of Turns Number of Turns Number of Turns
■ Typical response time 10 ms.
■
■ Maximum operating
Maximum leakage = pressure
RPCC, RPEC: 2 in 3/min./1000 psi, RPGC: 3 in3/min./1000 psi, RPIC: 4
=3 350 bar
3
in /min./1000 psi, RPKC: 5 in /min./1000 psi.
■ Maximum valve leakage at shutoff = less than 0,4 cc/min.
■ RPCC minimum setting for all spring ranges is 75 psi
OPTION ORDERING INFORMATION Model Codes printed in Red are Preferred Versions and most readily available
RP ✱ C – ✱ ✱ ✱
NF
Nominal
Maximum
Capacity Control** Adjustment Range Seal
Nominal Control** Orifice Options Seal
C Orifice
12 GPM* $ 31.90 L Standard Screw +$ 0.00 A 100 - 3000 psi +$ 0.00 N Buna-N +$ 0.00
B 4,0
E 25 GPMmm dia. $ 36.20 L
C Standard Screw +$ 4.10
Tamper Resistant B 50 - 1500NFBC
psi +$ 0.00 V N Buna-N
Viton +$ 2.00
C 4 mm
G
C mm dia. $ 51.80
50 GPM
4,8 K Calibrated
H Handknob +$ 5.00 C 150 - 6000 psi +$ 2.00 V Viton
I 100 GPM $ 97.30 Handknob with N 60 - 800NFCC
psi +$ 1.00
D 6,3 mm dia. Detent Lock C 4,8 mm
K 200 GPM $187.00 Q
D 60 -mm
2,5 400 psi +$ 1.00
E 9,6 mm dia. K Handknob
W 150 - 4500 psi +$ 0.00
NFDC
F 14,2 mm dia. A 6,3 mm
B 3,2 mm
Adjustment Range Options:
A, B, C, and W are standard set at 1000 psi.
NFEC
N Option is standard set at 400 psi.
E 9,6 mm
Q Option is standard set at 200 psi.
F 7,1 mm
** See page 162 for information * Minimum setting 75 psi on all ranges.
on Control Options Customer may specify pressure setting. +$ 1.10
NFFC
G 14,2 mm
H 9,6 mm
Visit www.sunhydraulics.com for detailed and complete technical information on our full line of products.
6 US Shortcut Catalogue #999-901-243
** See page 162 for information

on Control Options
Visit www.sunhydraulics.com for detailed and complete technical information on our full line of products.
66 UK Shortcut Catalogue #999-901-244

Circuit Savers
CHECK, PILOT-TO-CLOSE
3
b
3 1
Port Locating
Shoulder
Cartridge Dimensions
Typical Installation
a Capacity Cartridge Cavity a b c Torque
2 Model Code (Nm)
Port 40 L/min. COBA – XCN T - 163A 31 19,1 32 35/40
80 L/min. CODA – XCN T - 11A 34,9 22,2 31 40/50
Port 1
160 L/min. COFA – XCN T - 2A 34,9 28,6 35 60/70
320 L/min. COHA – XCN T - 17A 46 31,8 46 200/245
640 L/min. COJA – XCN T - 19A 63,5 41,3 59 465/500
Performance Curves
COBA CODA COFA COHA COJA
Typical Pressure Drop
12 12 12 12 12
9 9 9 9 9
P = bar
P = bar
P = bar
P = bar
P = bar
XEN XEN XEN XEN

6 XEN 6 6 6 6
3 XCN 3 XCN 3 XCN 3 XCN 3 XCN

XAN XAN XAN XAN
XAN
0 10 20 30 40 0 20 40 60 80 0 30 60 90 120 0 80 160 240 320 0 160 320 480 640

Q = L/min. Q = L/min. Q = L/min. Q = L/min. Q = L/min.
■ Maximum operating pressure = 350 bar

■ Pilot ratio = 1.8:1
■ Leakage rate when closed = 0,07 cc/min.
OPTION ORDERING INFORMATION

CO ✱ A – ✱ ✱ ✱
Nominal
Control** Cracking Pressure Seal
Capacity
B 40 L/min. X Standard Pilot A* 0,3 bar N Buna-N
D 80 L/min. B* 1,0 bar V Viton
F 160 L/min. C 2,0 bar
H 320 L/min. D 3,5 bar
J 640 L/min. E 5,0 bar
F 7,0 bar
* COBA and COFA are not

** See page 162 for information available in A and B
on Control Options Cracking Pressures.
UK Shortcut Catalogue #999-901-244 147

VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES


Vickers™
Ventiles
SystemStak
Flow Control Valve
Stromventile
Limiteurs de débit
Valvole regolatrici di portata
DGM FN Ć 3 Ć * Ć * * * Ć ( * * * ) Ć 40
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 SystemStak Valve 1 SystemStak Ventil 1 Appareil SystemStak 1 Valvola Systemstak

Manifold or Subplate Mounted Block oder AnschlußplattenĆ Montage sur bloc foré ou plaque Montaggio a blocchi o a piastra
montage de base
2 Flow Control 2 Stromventile 2 Fonction de limitation 2 Regolatrice Di Portata
Flow regulator (nonĆcompensated) Limiteur de débit (non compensé) Regolatore di portat (non compensata)
3 Interface 3 Anschlußbild 3 Plan de pose 3 Interfaccia
3 Ć ISO 4401Ć3 3 Ć ISO 4401Ć3 3 Ć ISO 4401Ć3 3 Ć ISO 4401Ć3
4 Direction Of Flow 4 Durchflußrichtung 4 Sens de débit 4 Direzione della portata
X Ć Meter Ćin (A and / or B) X Ć Zulaufdrosselung (A und / X Ć régulation en entrée (A et / X Ć regolazione in entrata (A e/o B)
Y Ć Meter Ćout (A and / or B) oder B) ou B) Y Ć regolazione in uscita (A e/o B)
Z Ć Meter Ćin (P line) Y Ć Ablaufdrosselung (A und / Y Ć régulation en sortie (A et / Z Ć regolazione in entrata (linea P)
Meter Ćout (T line) oder B) ou B) regolazione in uscita (linea T)
Z Ć Zulaufdrosselung (Leitung P) Z Ć régulation en entrée (ligne P)
Ablaufdrosselung (Leitung T) régulation en sortie (ligne T)
5 Control Line 5 Steuer leitung 5 Ligne régulée 5 Linea controllata
A Ć Line A (single or dual with B) A Ć Leitung A (Einzel oder doppel A Ć Ligne A (contrôle simple, ou A Ć Linea A (singolo o doppio con B)
B Ć Line B (single control) mit B) double avec B) B Ć Linea B (controllo singolo)
P Ć Line P (single control) B Ć Leitung B (Einzel steuerung) B Ć Ligne B (contrôle simple) P Ć Linea P (controllo singolo)
T Ć Line T (single control) P Ć Leitung P (Einzel steuerung) P Ć Ligne P (contrôle simple) T Ć Linea T (controllo singolo)
T Ć Leitung T (Einzel steuerung) T Ć Ligne T (contrôle simple)
6 Control Type 6 Steuerung 6 Type de réglage 6 Tipo di controllo
1 Ć Fine control 1 Ć Feineinstellung 1 Ć Fin 1 Ć controllo fine
2 Ć Standard control 2 Ć Standard steurerung 2 Ć Standard 2 Ć controllo standard
W Ć Screw W/Locknut (standard) W Ć Schraube mit Kontermutter W Ć vis et contreĆécrou (standard) W Ć Vite con dado di bloccaggio
H Ć Handknob (option) (Standard) H Ć molette (option) (standard)
H Ć Handeinstellknopf (wahlweise) H Ć Manopola (opzionale)
8 Control Line 8 Steuerleitung 8 Ligne régulée 8 Linea controllata
B Ć Line B (dual control with A) B Ć Leitung B (Doppelsteuerung B Ć Ligne B (contrôle double B Ć Linea B (singolo o doppio con A)
mit A) avec A)
9 Control Type 9 Steuerung 9 Type de réglage 9 Tipo di controllo
1 Ć Fine control 1 Ć Feineinstellung 1 Ć Fin 1 Ć controllo fine
2 Ć Standard control 2 Ć Standard steurerung 2 Ć Standard 2 Ć controllo standard
W Ć Screw W/Locknut (standard) W Ć Schraube mit Kontermutter W Ć vis et contreĆécrou (stanĆ W Ć Vite con dado di bloccaggio
H Ć Handknob (option) (Standard) dard) (standard)
H Ć Handeinstellknopf (wahlweise) H Ć molette (option) H Ć Manopola (opzionale)
11 Design 11 Seriennummer 11 Numéro de dessin 11 Serie
Released 10Ć1Ć90 IĆ3762ĆG
1
Item Model designation Body Item Model designation
Pos. Typenbezeichnung Gehäuse Pos. Typenbezeichnung
Rep. Code de désignation Corps Rep. Code de désignation
Pos. Codice di identificazione Corpo Pos. Codice di identificazione
DGMFNĆ3ĆXĆA** 694214 A&B&C DGMFNĆ3ĆXĆA*WĆB*W
DGMFNĆ3ĆXĆA**ĆB** 694117 B&C DGMFNĆ3ĆXĆA*W
DGMFNĆ3ĆXĆB** 694213 A DGMFNĆ3ĆXĆB*W
DGMFNĆ3ĆYĆA** 694216 A&B&C DGMFNĆ3ĆYĆA*WĆB*W
16 DGMFNĆ3ĆYĆA**ĆB** 694116 B&C DGMFNĆ3ĆYĆA*W
DGMFNĆ3ĆYĆB** 694215 A DGMFNĆ3ĆYĆB*W
DGMFNĆ3ĆZĆP** 694121 B&D DGMFNĆ3ĆZĆP*W
DGMFNĆ3ĆZĆT** 694118 B&C DGMFNĆ3ĆZĆT*W
13
12
16
P
A
B
T
10
8
4 6
2 9
7
5 15
14
3
1
A
Item Torque values

Pos. Anziehmoment
3 35Ć40 Nm. (310Ć354 lb.in.)
2
D
11
6
1
8
10
3
5
7
B
Item Part no.
Pos. TeileĆNr.
Rep. Nde pièce
1 876937 Ring Ring Bague Anello
2 694236 Nut (M8x.75) Mutter (M8x.75) Ecrou (M8x.75) Dado (M8x.75)
3 694119 Housing Gehäuse Bouchon percé pour passage Corpo valvola
de tige
4 694271 BackĆup Ring Stützring Bague antiĆextrusion Anello antiestrusione
5 262340 OĆRing OĆRing Joint torique OĆRing
6 197566 BackĆup Ring Stützring Bague antiĆextrusion Anello antiestrusione
7 262328 OĆRing OĆRing Joint torique OĆRing
8 694183 Needle Nadel Pointeau Spillo
9 694129 Spring Feder Ressort Molla
10 694110 Sleeve (Fine control 1) Hülse (Fein steuerung 1) Manchon (réglage fin 1) Bussola (controllo fine 1)
10 694112 Sleeve (Standard control 2) Hülse (Standard steuerung 2) Manchon (réglage standard 2) Bussola (controllo standard 2)
11 694230 Spacer Distanzscheibe Entretoise Distanziale
13 ĆĆĆĆ Nameplate Typenschild Plaque signalétique Piastina
14 262332 (4) 0ĆRing OĆRing Joint torique OĆRing
15 472553 Pin (3 x 6mm.) Stift (3 x 6mm.) Piom de positionnement (3 x 6mm.) Spina (3 x 6mm.)
16 See table Body Gehäuse Corps Corpo
17 694235 Adj. Sleeve Hülse (einstellung) Manchon de réglage Bussola per la regolazione
Not available for sale. Nicht als Ersatzteil erhältlich. Non disponible séparément. Non in vendita singolarmente
Available in seal kit 870707 Im Dichtungsatz 870707 Compris dans la pochette de Disponibile in kit di guarnzioni
enthalten. joints 870707. 870707.
Available in hand knob adjuster (without āLieferbarāāalsāāEinstellknopfĆ ĂCompris dans le kit de converĆ Disponibile nel kit di converĆ
keylock) conversion kit 868794 Umbausatzā868794. sion 868794 pour la molette de sione della manopola di regolaĆ
réglage sans verrouillage à clé. zione (senza chiave di bloccagĆ
gio)Ă868794.
ĂAvailable only in packages of 5 pieces. ĂNur lieferbar in packungon ĂDisponibles uniquement en kit ĂDispohible in kit da 5 pezzi
zu 5 stück. de 5 ressorts
3
All repairs must be made in clean Alle reparaturen müssen in einer Toutes les réparations doivent être Le riparazioni devono essere
conditions and by clean practices sauberen Umegebung durchgeführt faites dans des conditions saines et effettuate in ambiente pulito per
compatible with subsequent effiĆ werden. Die Hydraulik flüssigkeit par des moyens propres compatibles consentire un regolare funzionaĆ
cient operations of the unit in sysĆ nach ISO 4406 sollte einem avec le fonctionnement correct de mento dei componenti dei sistemi
tems having oil to ISO 4406 grade Reinheitsgrad von 18/14 oder besser l'appareil dans un système utilisant idraulici che utilizzano oli con profilo
18/14 or cleaner. entsprechen. de l ' huile de pureté égale ou di contaminazione di 18/14 o
supérieure à la norme ISO 4406; superiore conforme alle norme ISO
18/14. 4406.
Hand Knob Adjuster (Without KeyĆ Handeinstellknopf, (ohne Schloß) Montage du kit de conversion pour Istruzioni per il kit di conversione di
lock) Conversion kit instructions Umbauanweisungen molette de réglage sans verrouillage regolazione (senza chiave di blocĆ
à clé caggio).
Turn item 8 clockwise until it is Teil 8 nach rechts bis zum Anschlag
against the stop (item 1) .To avoid drehen (Teil 1). Um BeschädigunĆ Visser à fond le rep. 8 dans le sens Far ruotare in senso orario il particoĆ
damage to threads of item 8, careĆ gen des Gewindes von Teil 8 zu verĆ horaire (contre le rep. 1). En prenant lare 8 finche ' non tocca il fermo (parĆ
fully remove items 1, 2 from item 8 meiden, vorsichtig Teil 1 entfernen soin de ne pas endommager le fileĆ ticolare 1). Per evitare di danneggiaĆ
and discard. Install item 17 onto und Tiel 2 von Tiel 8 ziehen. Teil 17 in tage du rep. 8, retirer de ce dernier re la filettatura del particolare 8; riĆ
item 8. Slide item 18 against housĆ Teil 8 einbauen. Teil 18 gegen GeĆ les rep. 1 et 2 qui ne seront pas réutiĆ muovere i particolari 1 e 2 dall '8 e
ing on item 3. Lock in place with item häuse auf Tiel 3 schieben und auf lisés. Monter le rep. 17 sur le rep. 8. metterli da parte. Porre il particolare
19. Adjust to desired setting. TightĆ Position mit Teil 19 arretièren. Teil 20 Pousser le rep. 18 jusqu ' à qu ' il 17 sull '8. Far scorrere il particolare
en item 20 to maintain. festzièhen um die gewünschte Ein bute contre le corps du rep. 3. BloĆ 18 verso la sede sul particolare 3.
stellung beizubehalten. quer à l ' aide du rep. 19. Serrer le Bloccare in posizione col particolare
Available in hand knob adjuster rep. 20 pour maintenir le réglage à la 19. Eseguire poi la taratura della
(without keylock) conversion kit Lieferbar als EinstellknopfĆ valeur désirée. pressione desiderata e avvitare il
868794 Umbausatz 868794. (ohne Schloß) particolare 20 per mantenerla.
Compris dans le kit de conversion
868794 pour la molette de réglage Disponibile nel kit di conversioĆ
8 sans verrouillage à clé. ne della manopola di regolazione
18 3
20 (senza chiave di bloccaggio) 868794
19 17
P. O. Box 302
Troy, Michigan 48007Ć0302
U.S.A.
Printed in U.S.A.
4
VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES
10.7 Presostato
Presostato, pos. 50 DS 302 -20-350

Pressure Switches
for all Applications
DS-307(302) DS-103/ES/MS
(also with ATEX admittance)
see page 10
DS-104/EX DS-105
(with ATEX admittance)
see page 10
DAS ZEICHEN DER HYDROPA-GRUPPE

- HYDROSTAR
1.13/E
05/03
General Data
DS-307 or DS-302 8 1O-Ring
7 1Snap ring
Set of seals (non-sticking,
6 1
non-slipping)
5 1 Connection G ¼-female DS-307
4 1 Locking screw DS-302
3 1 Adjustable screw top
Micro switch (single-pole
2 1
double-throw)
1 1 Applience inlet - DIN 43650
Item No. Description
DS-307/V2 or DS-302/V2 8 1O-Ring

with scale 7 1Reading device and snap ring
Set of seals (non-sticking,
6 1
non-slipping)
5 1 Connection G ¼-female DS-307/V2
4 1 Locking screw DS-302/V2
3 1 Knurled knob with scale
2 1
double-throw)
DS-307/V2/AS-H2 or DS-302/V2/AS-H2
7 1 O-Ring
with scale and lock reading
device and 6 1 Reading device and snap ring
snap ring,
made of Set of seals (non-sticking, DS-307 /
red plastic 5 1
non-slipping) V2/AS-H2
4 1 Connection G ¼-female
Knurled knob with scale
3 1 and lock (lock E 10 H2) DS-302 /
V2/AS-H2
2 1
double-throw)
Description DS-307 / DS-302

These models are piston-spring type pressure switches. With pressure at zero the micro-switch remains
pressed and will only be released when the adjusted switching pressure has been reached.
In case of higher pressure the ram works against the spring. The piston pressure will then depend on the
initial spring force. Adjustment by turning the screw top (or knurled knob) which can be fixed with a
locking screw. The complete adjusting travel is approx. 9 mm.
Admissible ranges of application for pressure components, series DS
hazardous fluids* Pmax. £ 500 bar
non-hazardous fluids* Pmax. £ 1000 bar

* According to the regulation on hazardous materials
In the meaning of paragraph 9, sub-paragraph 2 of the regulation on pressure components DGRL 97/23/EC
For applications with higher pressure please contact our technical department !
2
R
Pressure Switch, Characteristics
piston diameter mm
DS-307/302 ø3 ø4 ø5 ø6
1. General
Design spring-loaded piston, because of mechanical turn it is no longer possible to get the spring screwed on "block"
Connection thread G ¼ female or subplate, pitch circle ø 44 mm
Adjustment adjustable screw top or knurled knob
Safety locking screw or lock (E 10 H2 [Type AS])
Mounting position variable
2. Hydraulic data
Switching pressure range 50-600 bar 50-420 bar 20-350 bar 40-240 bar 20-150 bar 10-100 bar 5-55 bar
Switching accuracy variations of less than 1%
Ambient temperature - 40 °C up to + 90 °C
Fluid oil, oil-in-water-emulsion
3. Electric data
Switch electro-mechanical double-throw switch
Current AC - DC current
Protection according IP 65
to DIN 40050
Electrical connection appliance inlet according to DIN 43650 (PG 11, on request PG 9 without additional price)
4. Features
Housing Aluminium
Standard body Brass
Switching travel 0,5 mm - reducing wear of seal and ram to a minimum
Subplates
valve mounting NG 6 and NG 10 (only for subplate connection Type DS-307/F or DS-302/F)
Rights of alteration reserved in sense of technical development !
Switching Capacity Electrical Connection

Standard Contact: Silver
Symbols
DS-307 (Standard) DS-302
max. switching capacity motor load
2 2
voltage resistive load (inductiv) 3 3
V A A
P P
1 (without 1 (without
250 AC 5 1
pressure) pressure)
24 DC 5 4
connection: connection:
Nominal switching capacity: NCC: clamp 1-2 NCC: clamp 1-3
Standard micro switch: Silver (Ag 999), CEE 24; VDE 0630 NOC: clamp 1-3 NOC: clamp 1-2
50 TSD circuits, T85, UL 1054/CSA C22.2 No. 55 6 TSD, T90
Appliance inlet (plug box) with indicator lamp
plug box pressure switch
On request: Gold on silver palladium
(max. load 1 A, 30 V.)
3
1
2
NOTE ! 0(MP) 1 2 3
The unit may only be installed by technical specialists. Comply with Utilization of the insert for indicator lamp only in connection with the
the national and international regulations for the installation of plug box (see graphical symbol above). The indicator lamp can be
electro-technical equipment. Voltage supply in compliance with connected to clamp 2 or clamp 3 on request. The clamp connection
EN 50178, SELV, PELV. Ensure that the equipment is not energized "MP" is directly provided on the sheet bar of the insert for indicator
before connecting the unit. lamp.
3
R
How to order DS-307 etc.
***= insert pressure range
DS-307 / / - / e.g. 055 (5-55 bar)
Pressure set at factory:
standard pressure increasing,
Standard DS-307,DS-302 on request decreasing.
AUX = Contact gold on

silver palladium
additional notes (indicated by bar) S = Viton
F = flange mounting G = 2 tapped holes
F/P = pressure switch with integrated (see page 7)
90°-subplate (see page 6) B = 2 mounting holes
V2 = scale and knurled knob (see page 7)
AS-H2 = with lock E10 H2 SL = silver contacts
SCH = panel mounting
PO = lead seal (not for version
with scale) pmax.
L-MP 24 = 4-pole appliance inlet 24 V-DC pmax. special
L-MP 220 = 4-pole appliance inlet 220 V-AC pressure ranges: standard sealing SS
LED-34 = plug with indicating function 55 = 5- 55 bar 300 bar 200 bar
DIN 43 650 100 = 10- 100 bar 400 bar 200 bar
MS = brass housing 150 = 20- 150 bar 500 bar -
SS = special sealing (low function) 240 = 40- 240 bar 500 bar 400 bar
only for the following pressure ranges: 350 = 20- 350 bar 600 bar 400 bar
5- 55 bar 10-100 bar 420 = 50- 420 bar 600 bar -
40-240 bar 20-350 bar 600 = 50- 600 bar 800 bar -
Dimensions DS-307/302
60 threaded connection:
G ¼ female
DS-307-*** or DS-302-***
Weight: 0,63 kg adjustable Protection IP 65
27 AF
screw top
85
Pressure adjustment
as follows:
40
locking
detachment of
screw 2.5 AF locking screw;
86 40
increase of pressure
when turning the
adjustable screw top
Limitation to avoid
the turn out of the
clockwise.
adjustable screw top on request max.
switching pressure
G¼
by means of a snap
ring. set - at factory.
standard 114
(***=pressure range)
60
DS-307/V2-*** or DS-302/V2-*** knurled
threaded connection:
knob G ¼ female
Weight: 0,66 kg
Protection IP 65
27 AF
85
Graduated ring for

40
precise pressure
locking
screw 2.5 AF adjustment; lockable
114 40 by means of locking
screw; the required
switching point is
pre-selectable
Limitation to avoid
the turn out of the
when turning the
knurled knob by knurled knob.
G¼
means of a snap
ring.
114 (***=pressure range)
with scale and knurled knob ø 30 mm
4
R
VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES
10.8 Filtros

VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES
10.8 Filtros

MAHLE filter data - Pi 0152 Mic - 852 516 Mic
Technical Data I ∆p [bar]
Flow rate [l/min]

Filter housing Pi 0152 Mic
Type Air breather, ,
Nom. pressure 0 bar
Proof pressure 0 bar
Nom. size 5300
Temperature range -40 °C up to 100 °C
Material St vzk
Material seals NBR
1 Filterelement 852 516 Mic

Media-Microns 10 µm
Filter surface 10250 cm²
Seals no Seals
Fluid compatibility of the filter: HLP
Version 98/1
KNECHT Filterwerke GmbH - MAHLE Industriefilter - Postfach 13 09 - 74603 Öhringen - Telefon (07941) 67-0 - Telefax (07941) 67-429
Technical Data II
Ø A
Dimensions [mm]
A 230
B 117
C 30
D Ø 70
B
Symbol
C
no diagram
Ø D
Version 98/1
Manual
INSTALLATION, OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS PI 0101 bis PI 0185
The Pi 0101 trough Pi 0126 breather filters have pot-shaped, housings made of non-corrosive material. The air intake is
located in the upper section, this prevents surface dust to be drawn in from the tank top. The cover is designed to
prevent entry of splash-water. The disposable, pleated elements can be replaced in a matter of seconds.
The Pi 0140 trough Pi 0185 breather filters have a housing made of galvanized sheet metal. The built-in o-ring provides
accurate at the tank connection.
With the choice of Mic or Sm-L elements the CETOP RP 98 H requirements are fullfilled. These specify the same
filtration degree for the breather filter as the system filter utelizes.
Mol-elements prevend oil vapors from exiting the tank. The oil vapors coagulate, forming drops within the pleated
coalescer layer, which are returned to the tank.
The types Pi 0101 - Pi 0185 may be equipped with a contamination indicator for optimal filter element exploitation. They
indicate when the filter element must be serviced and thus save unnecessary costs.
The contamination indicator responds at 65 mbar column and is available in two variations, i.e. with visual or electrical
signal. The unit is connected to the filter housing via an M 10x1 external thread nipple.
Subject to technical alternation.

Pi0101-0185-02/98k
Version 98/1
Spares / Prices
Prices:
Filter housing: PI 0152 MIC

Part number: 0774.932.8
upon request
1 Filterelement: 852 516 MIC BATCH SIZE 2 PCS

Part number: 0768.772.6
upon request
Spare part list
Spare element: 852 516 MIC BATCH SIZE 2 PCS

Part number: 0768.772.6upon request
Version 98/1
VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES
10.8 Filtros

8650 Modelos 8650
C O N J U N T O S D E F I LT R O D E M E D I A P R E S I Ó N Instrucciones de servicio
1 Especificaciones técnicas 3 Fuentes generales de información

Materiales de construcción de la carcasa: 3.1 Para consultar las dimensiones, parámetros
de funcionamiento, números de serie de
Cabeza: Hierro fundido gris elemento o de conjunto, información de
Cubeta: Acero al carbono pedido, notas, datos de rendimiento y
Válvula: Acero inoxidable y poliamida especificaciones, ver hoja de datos PME8650.
3.2 El presente equipo ha sido diseñado de
Presión máxima de trabajo: acuerdo con las directrices estipuladas en la
40 bar Directiva Europea de Presión 97/23/EC y ha
sido clasificado según el procedimiento de
Presión de prueba: ingeniería S.E.P. Declaramos que el equipo se
60 bar ajusta a lo establecido en el artículo 3, sección
3, cumpliendo, por lo tanto, las exigencias de
Presión de ruptura: la directiva. Con arreglo a lo dispuesto en
160 bar dicha directiva, el conjunto de filtro es
adecuado para ser utilizado únicamente con
Colapso del elemento: fluidos del grupo 2.
Elemento 9600 diferencial mínimo 20 bar 3.3 Cuando, bajo determinadas condiciones
especiales, se prevea que pueden
Margen de temperaturas de funcionamiento: sobrepasarse los límites permitidos, el cliente
De -43°C a + 120°C con juntas de nitrilo para deberá instalar los dispositivos de protección
fluidos derivados del petróleo adecuados en el sistema de conexión del
De -29°C a + 120°C con juntas de fluorocarbono fluido.
para fluidos sintéticos específicos
4 Instalación de la carcasa
hasta + 50°C para emulsión de aceite y agua, agua
glicol 4.1 El conjunto de filtro deberá instalarse en
posición vertical con la cubeta hacia abajo. Se
Opciones de ajuste de la válvula by-pass deberá dejar un espacio libre mínimo de 45
Presión de craqueo 3.4 ± 0.3 bar Sin derivación mm bajo la cubeta del filtro para la instalación
y extracción del elemento filtrante.
Juntas: 4.2 Comprobar que las roscas de los dispositivos
Nitrilo o fluorocarbono de presión diferencial o los tapones de
obturación están limpias y secas, lubricando a
continuación con un compuesto adecuado de
PRECAUCIÓN:
protección contra la excoriación antes de
Las subidas de flujo máximas no deberán apretar. Los dispositivos de presión diferencial
exceder de 1,3 veces el flujo normal. de conexión a rosca deberán apretarse hasta
un par de torsión de 54 Nm (40 pies /lb), y
todos los indicadores visuales deberán ser
El usuario deberá verificar las condiciones de
claramente visibles.
funcionamiento en curso al objeto de garantizar que
el elemento, la carcasa y todas las juntas son NOTA: Las tomas del dispositivo de presión
compatibles con la aplicación y el fluido, y que son diferencial se pueden cubrir con un tapón de
conformes a la normativa de seguridad local. Si se obturación; número de referencia de pieza
desea ampliar información, contactar con Pall HC9000D153.
Machinery and Equipment o con el distribuidor Instalar siempre una junta tórica de dimensiones
oficial de Pall. estándar –014 cuando se utilice el tapón de
obturación; de lo contrario las sustancias
2 Recepción del equipo contaminantes podrían arrastrarse aguas abajo del
La carcasa del filtro y todo el equipo opcional se elemento filtrante.
suministran empaquetados de forma individual para 4.3 Montar el conjunto de filtro utilizando los
ser montados por el cliente. Desembalar cuatros orificios roscados de montaje M10 x
cuidadosamente y comprobar que no se deja 1.5 -6H, BS3643 x 12.
ningún elemento en el material de embalaje a
4.4 Utilizar una válvula de control en la salida si
desechar. existe posibilidad de flujo inverso.
14
8650 Modelos 8650
5.1 Un sistema contaminado puede bloquear

PRECAUCIÓN: rápidamente un elemento nuevo; por ello,
El flujo inverso a través del elemento filtrante puede ser necesario realizar algunos cambios
puede causar daños en el sistema. de elemento hasta estabilizar la vida del
mismo, que podrá también prolongarse
4.5 Comprobar que las roscas de las conexiones mediante el ajuste correcto en el depósito de
están limpias y secas, lubricando a un respiradero de aire.
continuación con un compuesto adecuado de 5.2 Si se descubre una fuga, reemplazar la junta
protección contra la excoriación. Conectar las correspondiente.
líneas o tuberías a los puertos. 5.3 Si, a pesar de ello, la fuga persiste, verificar
las superficies de sellado y cambiar todas las
ADVERTENCIA: piezas defectuosas.
UTILIZAR CONEXIONES Y ADAPTADORES
COMPATIBLES CON LOS PUERTOS DEL 6 Dispositivos de presión diferencial
EQUIPO COMO SE INDICA EN LOS 6.1 Los dispositivos de presión diferencial se
NÚMEROS DE REFERENCIA DE PIEZA DE activan cuando los elementos necesitan ser
LA PLACA DE DATOS NOMINALES Y LOS sustituidos o debido a la alta viscosidad del
QUE VIENEN REFLEJADOS EN LAS HOJAS fluido en condiciones de arranque en frío.
DE DATOS: EL EMPLEO DE CONEXIONES 6.2 Si se dispone de indicador visual y estuviese
Y ADAPTADORES INCORRECTOS PUEDE activado durante el arranque en frío (el botón
PROVOCAR FALLOS EN LA CARCASA DEL sobresale 5 mm) reajustar pulsando el botón
FILTRO O EN EL DISTRIBUIDOR CON al alcanzarse la temperatura normal de
RESULTADO DE PÉRDIDA DE PRESIÓN, funcionamiento. Si, después del reajuste, el
PUDIENDO OCASIONARSE UN FALLO indicador volviese a activarse, reemplazar el
GENERAL DEL SISTEMA O LESIONES elemento correspondiente.
PERSONALES.
NOTA: El indicador visual opcional ‘P’ se activa por
ESPANOL
temperatura y se reajusta de forma manual. Sin
4.6 Antes del funcionamiento se deberá proceder señal por debajo de 0º C; con señal por encima de
al purgado del sistema. Abrir una vuelta y 27ºC.
media la válvula de purgado. Hacer circular el 6.3 Si el sistema dispone de interruptor eléctrico y
sistema y llenar el filtro hasta que todo el aire se activa durante un arranque en frío (luz roja),
haya sido expulsado a través de la válvula. verificar que la luz se apaga cuando se
Cerrar a continuación la válvula. Presurizar alcanza la temperatura normal de
totalmente el sistema y comprobar las funcionamiento. Si no es así, se deberá
posibles fugas. Si se detecta presencia de reemplazar el elemento. Esto se puede utilizar
fugas, consultar el punto 5. como indicación de calentamiento.
6.4 Al objeto de controlar el filtro y el circuito, se
PRECAUCIÓN: recomienda utilizar tanto la indicación positiva
Si no se realiza el purgado correcto de la de integridad del circuito (luz verde) como la
carcasa del filtro, aumentará la proporción de negativa (luz roja indicando elemento sucio).
aire disuelto en el fluido, lo que acortará la
vida del mismo y podrá provocar otros Figura 1
problemas en el sistema hidráulico.
NOTA: Cubrir el dispositivo de indicación visual y la Blanco (A)

placa de datos nominales si se pinta el conjunto de Negro (C) o etiqueta 1
filtro o etiqueta 2 Rojo (B)
o etiqueta 3
5 Mantenimiento rutinario
Únicamente se requiere la inspección periódica de
la presión diferencial del dispositivo de advertencia
y la sustitución programada del elemento filtrante
cada seis meses o cuando se indique. Asegurarse
de la existencia en almacén de los necesarios
elementos de recambio.
15
8650 Modelos 8650
Conexiones eléctricas y características

nominales de todas las opciones de interrupción ADVERTENCIA:
de presión diferencial. SI NO SE LIBERA LA PRESIÓN DEL FILTRO
110 VCA = 4A (inductivo), ANTES DE LLEVAR A CABO EL
4A (resistivo) MANTENIMIENTO DEL ELEMENTO, SE
PUEDE PROVOCAR UNA PÉRDIDA
220 VCA = 4A (inductivo), EXPLOSIVA DE FLUIDO, DAÑOS EN EL
4A (resistivo) EQUIPO Y LESIONES PERSONALES.
28 VCC = 3A (inductivo),
5A (resistivo)
7.2 Abrir el tapón de drenaje (7) y drenar el fluido
48 VCC = 1A (inductivo), a un recipiente adecuado. Desechar el fluido
1.5A (resistivo) de acuerdo con la normativas locales de salud
125 VCC = 0.25A (inductivo), y seguridad. Desenroscar el anillo ‘Rotolok’ (8)
0.5A (resistivo) girando en sentido contrario a las agujas del
Irrupción máxima - 24 amperios. reloj cuando se mira desde abajo y desmontar
la cubeta del filtro (2) del conjunto de cabeza
Listado de características nominales de lab. (1).
suscriptor
7.3 Extraer el elemento (5) e inspeccionar
4 amperios a 250 VCA cuidadosamente la posible existencia de
1/4 amperios inductivo a 110 VCC contaminación visible sobre la superficie. En
condiciones normales, no debería existir
1/2 amperios resistivo a 110 VCC
suciedad, por lo que la presencia de partículas
Funcionamiento del interruptor de presión o elementos contaminantes en el interior de la
diferencial eléctrico cubeta del filtro (2) y en el conjunto de la
cabeza del filtro pueden constituir una señal
Cuando se sobrepasa la presión diferencial
de advertencia previa de una avería de los
preseleccionada, el interruptor de continuidad
componentes del sistema, pudiendo indicar
cambia de ‘C’ - ‘A’ a ‘C’ - ‘B’
un fallo potencial. Sustituir el elemento y la
Cuando la presión diferencial disminuye, la junta tórica correspondiente según lo
continuidad vuelve a ‘C’ - ‘A’ estipulado en los procedimientos de
Seguridad e Higiene en el trabajo locales. El
elemento filtrante NO DEBE LIMPIARSE. Toda
ADVERTENCIA: tentativa de limpiar el filtro puede provocar la
EL FUNCIONAMIENTO CONTINUO DEL degradación del medio filtrante y permitir el
FILTRO CON EL DISPOSITIVO DE PRESIÓN paso del fluido contaminado a través del filtro.
DIFERENCIAL ACTIVADO PERMITIRÁ EL
PASO DE CONTAMINANTES A TRAVÉS DEL ADVERTENCIA:
FILTRO, PUDIENDO DAÑAR EL ELEMENTO
NO INTENTAR LIMPIAR O REUTILIZAR EL
Y, EVENTUALMENTE, PROVOCAR FALLOS
ELEMENTO.
DE LA CARCASA DEL FILTRO O DEL
DISTRIBUIDOR CON RESULTADO DE
PÉRDIDA DE PRESIÓN, PUDIENDO 7.4 Inspeccionar los posibles daños o
OCASIONARSE UN FALLO GENERAL DEL disfunciones del conjunto de la cabeza del
SISTEMA O LESIONES PERSONALES. filtro (1) y la válvula de by-pass (4). En caso de
observarse daños, sustituir el conjunto de la
cabeza del filtro. Eliminar toda la suciedad
7 Mantenimiento del elemento acumulada en el interior de la cubeta del filtro
filtrante y del conjunto de cabeza, impidiendo que los
Consultar la figura 2 (página 46) o el listado de elementos contaminantes puedan alcanzar la
piezas (punto 9) para ver los números de referencia. salida y fluir aguas abajo. NO hacer funcionar
Extraer y sustituir el elemento según el siguiente el sistema en ausencia del elemento filtrante
procedimiento: (5). Verificar que la junta tórica (3) del conjunto
de cabeza (1) no están dañados. Comprobar
7.1 Cerrar y liberar la presión del sistema. siempre el número de referencia de pieza del
elemento filtrante de sustitución (5) con la
placa de datos nominales del conjunto.
16
8650 Modelos 8650
7.6 Purgar el sistema y verificar las fugas.

ADVERTENCIA:
7.7 Después de cambiar el elemento,
SI NO SE SUSTITUYEN LAS PIEZAS COMPROBAR EL REAJUSTE DEL
DAÑADAS DEL CONJUNTO DEL FILTRO, DISPOSITIVO DE ADVERTENCIA DE
SE PUEDE PROVOCAR UN FALLO EN LOS PRESIÓN DIFERENCIAL PULSANDO EL
COMPONENTES HIDRÁULICOS DEL BOTÓN. Los dispositivos eléctricos se
SISTEMA O UNA DEGRADACIÓN DE SU reajustan automáticamente. Cuando el
RENDIMIENTO. sistema alcance la temperatura normal de
funcionamiento, verificar que el interruptor
eléctrico no ha actuado y que el botón de
7.5 Lubricar la junta tórica del elemento con fluido advertencia visual permanece pulsado. Si el
del sistema limpio y empujar el extremo indicador visual se eleva debido a una
abierto del elemento filtrante (5) directamente condición de arranque en frío, reajustar de
en el manguito del conjunto de cabeza (1). nuevo como se explica en el punto 6.
Comprobar que las roscas del anillo Rotolok
y de la cabeza están limpias y secas. Lubricar
8 Muestreo de fluidos
ligeramente las roscas con fluido del sistema
limpio y enroscar el anillo Rotolok (8) con la Se puede llevar a cabo un muestreo óptimo de
cubeta (2) al conjunto de la cabeza. No se verificación de las condiciones del fluido por medio
conseguirá una mayor efectividad de la junta de adaptadores de toma de muestras instalados en
tórica apretándola en exceso. combinación con el dispositivo de presión
diferencial o en lugar del mismo. De este modo,
podremos utilizar para los muestreos aguas arriba y
ADVERTENCIA: abajo los puertos roscados paralelos BSP de 1/4
NO UTILIZAR LLAVES DE TUBO, pulgadas. Para ampliar información, consultar con
MARTILLOS O HERRAMIENTAS SIMILARES Pall Machinery & Equipement o con el distribuidor
PARA APRETAR LA CUBETA. autorizado Pall local. Pall ofrece un servicio de
análisis de contaminación de fluidos: consultar con
ESPANOL
la oficina de ventas de Pall.
9. Números de serie
Número de artículo. Descripción
1 Conjunto de cabeza
2 Cubeta del filtro
3 Junta tórica
4 Válvula de by-pass
5 Elemento filtrante con junta tórica
6 Dispositivo de presión diferencial
7 Tapón de drenaje
8 Anillo Rotolok
10. Accesorios
Artículo Número de serie Pall Descripción
5 Ver hoja de datos Elemento filtrante
3 H8650SKH Juego de juntas, nitrilo
3 H8650SKZ Juego de juntas, fluorocarbono
17
8650 8650 Series
M E D I U M P R E S S U R E F I LT E R A S S E M B L I E S service instructions
46
8650 8650 Series
M E D I U M P R E S S U R E F I LT E R A S S E M B L I E S service instructions
Pall Machinery and Equipment

A division of Pall Europe Limited
Europa House, Havant Street
Portsmouth PO1 3PD, England
(023) 9230 3303 telephone

(023) 9230 2507 fax
m&e_sales@pall.com
Visit us on the web at www.pall.com/m&e

Pall Corporation has offices and plants throughout the world in locations including:
Argentina, Australia, Austria, Belgium, Brazil, Canada, China, France, Germany, Hong Kong, India,
Indonesia, Ireland, Italy, Japan, Korea, Malaysia, Mexico, the Netherlands, New Zealand, Norway,
Poland, Puerto Rico, Russia, Singapore, South Africa, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan,
Thailand, United Kingdom, United States, and Venezuela. Distributors are located in all major
industrial areas of the world.
Because of developments in technology these data or procedures may be subject to change.

Consequently we advise users to review their continuing validity annually.
Part numbers quoted above are protected by the Copyright of Pall Europe Limited.
and Pall are trade marks of Pall Corporation.

Filtration. Separation. Solution is a service mark of Pall Corporation.
©2003, Pall Europe Limited.
February 2003. Printed in England. PME SI 8650/20651/0203

VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES
10.8 Filtros

4010/4011 Modelos 4010/4011
C O N J U N T O S D E F I LT R O D E A LTA P R E S I Ó N Instrucciones de servicio
1 Especificaciones técnicas 3 Fuentes generales de información

Materiales de construcción de la carcasa: 3.1 Para consultar las dimensiones, parámetros
de funcionamiento, números de serie de
Cabeza: Hierro SG elemento o de conjunto, información de
Cubeta: Acero al carbono pedido, notas, datos de rendimiento y
Válvula: Hierro SG especificaciones, ver hoja de datos PME4010.
3.2 El presente equipo ha sido diseñado de
Presión máxima de trabajo: acuerdo con las directrices estipuladas en la
280 bar Directiva Europea de Presión 97/23/EC y ha
sido clasificado según el procedimiento de
Presión de prueba: ingeniería S.E.P. Declaramos que el equipo se
420 bar ajusta a lo establecido en el artículo 3, sección
3, cumpliendo, por lo tanto, las exigencias de
Presión de ruptura: la directiva. Con arreglo a lo dispuesto en
1000 bar dicha directiva, el conjunto de filtro es
adecuado para ser utilizado únicamente con
Colapso del elemento: fluidos del grupo 2.
Elemento 9800 diferencial mínimo 20 bar 3.3 Cuando, bajo determinadas condiciones
Elemento 9801 diferencial mínimo 210 bar especiales, se prevea que pueden
sobrepasarse los límites permitidos, el cliente
Margen de temperaturas de funcionamiento: deberá instalar los dispositivos de protección
De -43°C a + 120°C con juntas de nitrilo para adecuados en el sistema de conexión del
fluidos derivados del petróleo fluido.
De -29°C a + 120°C con juntas de fluorocarbono 4 Instalación de la carcasa
para fluidos sintéticos específicos
4.1 El conjunto de filtro deberá instalarse en
hasta + 50°C para emulsión de aceite y agua, agua posición vertical con la cubeta hacia abajo. Se
glicol deberá dejar un espacio libre mínimo de
Opciones de ajuste de la válvula by-pass: 60 mm bajo la cubeta del filtro para la
instalación y extracción del elemento filtrante.
Presión de craqueo 3.4 ± 0.3 bar Sin derivación
4.2 Comprobar que las roscas de los dispositivos
Juntas: de presión diferencial o los tapones de
obturación están limpias y secas, lubricando a
Nitrilo o fluorocarbono
continuación con un compuesto adecuado de
protección contra la excoriación antes de
PRECAUCIÓN: apretar. Los dispositivos de presión diferencial
Las subidas de flujo máximas no deberán de conexión a rosca deberán apretarse hasta
exceder de 1,3 veces el flujo normal. un par de torsión de 54 Nm (40 pies /lb), y
todos los indicadores visuales deberán ser
claramente visibles.
El usuario deberá verificar las condiciones de
NOTA: Las tomas del dispositivo de presión
funcionamiento en curso al objeto de garantizar que
diferencial se pueden cubrir con un tapón de
el elemento, la carcasa y todas las juntas son
obturación; número de referencia de pieza
compatibles con la aplicación y el fluido, y que son
HC9000D153.
conformes a la normativa de seguridad local. Si se
desea ampliar información, contactar con Pall Instalar siempre una junta tórica de dimensiones
Machinery and Equipment o con el distribuidor estándar –014 cuando se utilice el tapón de
oficial de Pall. obturación; de lo contrario las sustancias
contaminantes podrían arrastrarse aguas abajo del
2 Recepción del equipo elemento filtrante.
La carcasa del filtro y todo el equipo opcional se 4.3 Montar el conjunto de filtro utilizando los tres
suministran empaquetados de forma individual para orificios roscados de montaje M10 x 1.5 -6H,
ser montados por el cliente. Desembalar BS3643 x 15.
cuidadosamente y comprobar que no se deja 4.4 Utilizar una válvula de control en la salida si
ningún elemento en el material de embalaje a existe posibilidad de flujo inverso.
desechar.
14
4010/4011 Modelos 4010/4011
5.1 Un sistema contaminado puede bloquear

PRECAUCIÓN: rápidamente un elemento nuevo; por ello,
El flujo inverso a través del elemento filtrante puede ser necesario realizar algunos cambios
puede causar daños en el sistema. de elemento hasta estabilizar la vida del
mismo, que podrá también prolongarse
4.5 Comprobar que las roscas de las conexiones mediante el ajuste correcto en el depósito de
están limpias y secas, lubricando a un respiradero de aire.
continuación con un compuesto adecuado de 5.2 Si se descubre una fuga, reemplazar la junta
protección contra la excoriación. Conectar las correspondiente.
líneas o tuberías a los puertos. 5.3 Si, a pesar de ello, la fuga persiste, verificar
las superficies de sellado y cambiar todas las
ADVERTENCIA: piezas defectuosas.
UTILIZAR CONEXIONES Y ADAPTADORES
COMPATIBLES CON LOS PUERTOS DEL 6 Dispositivos de presión diferencial
EQUIPO COMO SE INDICA EN LOS 6.1 Los dispositivos de presión diferencial se
NÚMEROS DE REFERENCIA DE PIEZA DE activan cuando los elementos necesitan ser
LA PLACA DE DATOS NOMINALES Y LOS sustituidos o debido a la alta viscosidad del
QUE VIENEN REFLEJADOS EN LAS HOJAS fluido en condiciones de arranque en frío.
DE DATOS: EL EMPLEO DE CONEXIONES 6.2 Si se dispone de indicador visual y estuviese
Y ADAPTADORES INCORRECTOS PUEDE activado durante el arranque en frío (el botón
PROVOCAR FALLOS EN LA CARCASA DEL sobresale 5 mm) reajustar pulsando el botón
FILTRO O EN EL DISTRIBUIDOR CON al alcanzarse la temperatura normal de
RESULTADO DE PÉRDIDA DE PRESIÓN, funcionamiento. Si, después del reajuste, el
PUDIENDO OCASIONARSE UN FALLO indicador volviese a activarse, reemplazar el
GENERAL DEL SISTEMA O LESIONES elemento correspondiente.
PERSONALES.
NOTA: El indicador visual opcional ‘P’ se activa por
ESPANOL
temperatura y se reajusta de forma manual. Sin
4.6 Antes del funcionamiento se deberá proceder señal por debajo de 0º C; con señal por encima de
al purgado del sistema. Abrir una vuelta y 27ºC.
media la válvula de purgado. Hacer circular el 6.3 Si el sistema dispone de interruptor eléctrico y
sistema y llenar el filtro hasta que todo el aire se activa durante un arranque en frío (luz roja),
haya sido expulsado a través de la válvula. verificar que la luz se apaga cuando se
Cerrar a continuación la válvula. Presurizar alcanza la temperatura normal de
totalmente el sistema y comprobar las funcionamiento. Si no es así, se deberá
posibles fugas. Si se detecta presencia de reemplazar el elemento. Esto se puede utilizar
fugas, consultar el punto 5. como indicación de calentamiento.
6.4 Al objeto de controlar el filtro y el circuito, se
PRECAUCIÓN: recomienda utilizar tanto la indicación positiva
Si no se realiza el purgado correcto de la de integridad del circuito (luz verde) como la
carcasa del filtro, aumentará la proporción de negativa (luz roja indicando elemento sucio).
aire disuelto en el fluido, lo que acortará la
vida del mismo y podrá provocar otros Figura 1
problemas en el sistema hidráulico.
NOTA: Cubrir el dispositivo de indicación visual y la Blanco (A)

placa de datos nominales si se pinta el conjunto de Negro (C) o etiqueta 1
filtro. o etiqueta 2 Rojo (B)
o etiqueta 3
5 Mantenimiento rutinario
Únicamente se requiere la inspección periódica de
la presión diferencial del dispositivo de advertencia
y la sustitución programada del elemento filtrante
cada seis meses o cuando se indique. Asegurarse
de la existencia en almacén de los necesarios
elementos de recambio.
15
4010/4011 Modelos 4010/4011
Conexiones eléctricas y características

nominales de todas las opciones de interrupción ADVERTENCIA:
de presión diferencial: SI NO SE LIBERA LA PRESIÓN DEL FILTRO
110 VCA = 4A (inductivo), ANTES DE LLEVAR A CABO EL
4A (resistivo) MANTENIMIENTO DEL ELEMENTO, SE
PUEDE PROVOCAR UNA PÉRDIDA
220 VCA = 4A (inductivo), EXPLOSIVA DE FLUIDO, DAÑOS EN EL
4A (resistivo) EQUIPO Y LESIONES PERSONALES.
28 VCC = 3A (inductivo),
5A (resistivo)
7.2 Abrir el tapón de drenaje (7) y drenar el fluido
48 VCC = 1A (inductivo), a un recipiente adecuado. Desechar el fluido
1.5A (resistivo) de acuerdo con la normativas locales de salud
125 VCC = 0.25A (inductivo), y seguridad. Desenroscar y extraer la cubeta
0.5A (resistivo) del filtro (2) del conjunto de cabeza (1),
Irrupción máxima - 24 amperios. girando en sentido contrario a las agujas del
reloj cuando se mira desde abajo. Podría ser
Listado de características nominales de lab. necesario utilizar una llave tubular de 30 mm y
suscriptor una barra en “T” en el hexágono de la base de
4 amperios a 250 VCA la cubeta del filtro para comenzar a aflojar la
cubeta. Es importante no ejercer una fuerza
1/4 amperios inductivo a 110 VCC
desequilibrada sobre la cubeta al aflojarla.
1/2 amperios resistivo a 110 VCC
7.3 Extraer el elemento (5) e inspeccionar
Funcionamiento del interruptor de presión cuidadosamente la posible existencia de
diferencial eléctrico: contaminación visible sobre la superficie. En
condiciones normales, no debería existir
Cuando se sobrepasa la presión diferencial
suciedad, por lo que la presencia de partículas
preseleccionada, el interruptor de continuidad
o elementos contaminantes en el interior de la
cambia de ‘C’ - ‘A’ a ‘C’ - ‘B’
cubeta del filtro (2) y en el conjunto de la
Cuando la presión diferencial disminuye, la cabeza del filtro pueden constituir una señal
continuidad vuelve a ‘C’ - ‘A’ de advertencia previa de una avería de los
componentes del sistema, pudiendo indicar
un fallo potencial. Sustituir el elemento y la
ADVERTENCIA: junta tórica correspondiente según lo
EL FUNCIONAMIENTO CONTINUO DEL estipulado en los procedimientos de
FILTRO CON EL DISPOSITIVO DE PRESIÓN Seguridad e Higiene en el trabajo locales. El
DIFERENCIAL ACTIVADO PERMITIRÁ EL elemento filtrante NO DEBE LIMPIARSE. Toda
PASO DE CONTAMINANTES A TRAVÉS DEL tentativa de limpiar el filtro puede provocar la
FILTRO, PUDIENDO DAÑAR EL ELEMENTO degradación del medio filtrante y permitir el
Y, EVENTUALMENTE, PROVOCAR FALLOS paso del fluido contaminado a través del filtro.
DE LA CARCASA DEL FILTRO O DEL
DISTRIBUIDOR CON RESULTADO DE ADVERTENCIA:
PÉRDIDA DE PRESIÓN, PUDIENDO
NO INTENTAR LIMPIAR O REUTILIZAR EL
OCASIONARSE UN FALLO GENERAL DEL
ELEMENTO.
SISTEMA O LESIONES PERSONALES.
7.4 Inspeccionar los posibles daños o

7 Mantenimiento del elemento disfunciones del conjunto de la cabeza del
filtrante filtro (1) y la válvula de by-pass (4). En caso de
Consultar la figura 2 (página 46) o el listado de observarse daños, sustituir el conjunto de la
piezas (punto 9) para ver los números de referencia. cabeza del filtro. Eliminar toda la suciedad
Extraer y sustituir el elemento según el siguiente acumulada en el interior de la cubeta del filtro
procedimiento: y del conjunto de cabeza, impidiendo que los
elementos contaminantes puedan alcanzar la
7.1 Cerrar y liberar la presión del sistema. salida y fluir aguas abajo. NO hacer funcionar
el sistema en ausencia del elemento filtrante
(5). Verificar que la junta tórica (3) del conjunto
de cabeza (1) no están dañados. Comprobar
siempre el número de referencia de pieza del
elemento filtrante de sustitución (5) con la
16 placa de datos nominales del conjunto.
4010/4011 Modelos 4010/4011
7.6 Purgar el sistema y verificar las fugas.

ADVERTENCIA:
7.7 Después de cambiar el elemento,
SI NO SE SUSTITUYEN LAS PIEZAS COMPROBAR EL REAJUSTE DEL
DAÑADAS DEL CONJUNTO DEL FILTRO, DISPOSITIVO DE ADVERTENCIA DE
SE PUEDE PROVOCAR UN FALLO EN LOS PRESIÓN DIFERENCIAL PULSANDO EL
COMPONENTES HIDRÁULICOS DEL BOTÓN. Los dispositivos eléctricos se
SISTEMA O UNA DEGRADACIÓN DE SU reajustan automáticamente. Cuando el
RENDIMIENTO. sistema alcance la temperatura normal de
funcionamiento, verificar que el interruptor
eléctrico no ha actuado y que el botón de
7.5 Lubricar la junta tórica del elemento con fluido advertencia visual permanece pulsado. Si el
del sistema limpio y empujar el extremo indicador visual se eleva debido a una
abierto del elemento filtrante (5) directamente condición de arranque en frío, reajustar de
en el manguito de la cabeza y del conjunto de nuevo como se explica en el punto 6.
la válvula de derivación (1 y 4). Comprobar
que las roscas de la cubeta y de la cabeza
8 Muestreo de fluidos
están limpias y secas. Lubricar ligeramente las
roscas de la cubeta (2) con fluido del sistema Se puede llevar a cabo un muestreo óptimo de
limpio y enroscar la cubeta del filtro al verificación de las condiciones del fluido por medio
conjunto de la cabeza. Apretar la cubeta hasta de adaptadores de toma de muestras instalados en
un par de 100 Nm (74 pies /lb). No se combinación con el dispositivo de presión
conseguirá una mayor efectividad de la junta diferencial o en lugar del mismo. De este modo,
tórica apretándola en exceso. Cerrar el tapón podremos utilizar para los muestreos aguas arriba y
de purga (7). abajo los puertos roscados paralelos BSP de 1/4
pulgadas. Para ampliar información, consultar con
Pall Machinery & Equipement o con el distribuidor
ADVERTENCIA: autorizado Pall local. Pall ofrece un servicio de
NO UTILIZAR LLAVES DE TUBO, análisis de contaminación de fluidos: consultar con
ESPANOL
MARTILLOS O HERRAMIENTAS SIMILARES la oficina de ventas de Pall.
PARA APRETAR LA CUBETA.
9. Números de serie
Número de artículo. Descripción
1 Conjunto de cabeza
2 Cubeta del filtro
3 Junta tórica
4 Válvula de by-pass
5 Elemento filtrante con junta tórica
6 Dispositivo de presión diferencial
7 Tapon de venteo
10. Accesorios
Artículo Número de serie Pall Descripción
5 Ver hoja de datos Elemento filtrante
3 H4010SKH Juego de juntas, nitrilo
3 H4010SKZ Juego de juntas, fluorocarbono
17
4010/4011 4010/4011 Series
H I G H P R E S S U R E F I LT E R A S S E M B L I E S service instructions
46
4010/4011 4010/4011 Series
H I G H P R E S S U R E F I LT E R A S S E M B L I E S service instructions
Pall Machinery and Equipment

A division of Pall Europe Limited
Europa House, Havant Street
Portsmouth PO1 3PD, England
(023) 9230 3303 telephone

(023) 9230 2507 fax
m&e_sales@pall.com
Visit us on the web at www.pall.com/m&e

Pall Corporation has offices and plants throughout the world in locations including:
Argentina, Australia, Austria, Belgium, Brazil, Canada, China, France, Germany, Hong Kong, India,
Indonesia, Ireland, Italy, Japan, Korea, Malaysia, Mexico, the Netherlands, New Zealand, Norway,
Poland, Puerto Rico, Russia, Singapore, South Africa, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan,
Thailand, United Kingdom, United States, and Venezuela. Distributors are located in all major
industrial areas of the world.
Because of developments in technology these data or procedures may be subject to change.

Consequently we advise users to review their continuing validity annually.
Part numbers quoted above are protected by the Copyright of Pall Europe Limited.
and Pall are trade marks of Pall Corporation.

Filtration. Separation. Solution is a service mark of Pall Corporation.
©2002, Pall Europe Limited.
September 2002. Printed in England. PME SI 4010/4011/1321716/0902

VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES
10.9 El controlar

VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES
10.9 El controlar

Länna, S-142 50 SKOGÅS Ordertel 08-771 00 04 Växel 08-771 02 20 Email info@hemomatik.se
Stockholm, Sweden Orderfax 08-771 62 00 Teknisk 08-771 35 80 Internet www.hemomatik.se
VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES
10.9 El controlar

21.610/1
RAK: Universal thermostat

For controlling and monitoring the temperature of liquids in baths, containers, pipes and ducts.
Because of its modular design and universal housing, the thermostat is very versatile. It can be
used as: a stem-type thermostat with protective tube (pocket); a clamp-on thermostat on pipes; a
thermostat with a remote sensor; or a double thermostat.
Universal housing made of plastic; can be fitted in various ways; snap-on lid with window, sealable;
internal setpoint adjuster; thermostat module with single-pole change-over contacts; capillary tube
(which can be uncoiled according to needs, depending on the fitting method) and sensor cartridge;
screw terminals for wire of max. 1.5 mm2; cable screw fitting for cable of up to Ø 9 mm.
Type Setting range Switching Capillary Sensor Max. temp.
difference tube cartridge of sensor
[°C] [K] [mm] [mm] [°C]
As a temperature controller-monitor (TR, TM); to DIN 3440
RAK 82.4/3773M 5...30 4 800 80 200
RAK 82.4/3770M –10...50 4 1600 68 180
RAK 82.4/3728M 15...95 4 800 68 200 T
RAK 82.4/3754M 40...120 4 1600 68 200

RAK 82.4/3726M 50...130 4 800 68 200
RAK 82.4/3729M 80...160 4 1600 68 200 Y02103
RAK 82.4/3753M 150...230 4 1000 68 280
As a safety temperature limiter (STB); to DIN 3440; intrinsically safe; with mechanical lock
RAK 74.4/3727M 120/110/100/95 1) 20 800 68 170 T
RAK 74.4/3768M 130/120/100/110/95 1) 20 800 68 170
As a temperature limiter (TB); as per DIN 3440; with mechanical lock
RAK 84.4/3782M 20...60 10 800 68 200
Y02115
RAK 84.4/3783M 50...130 10 800 68 220
As STB for exhaust pipes with sensor tube and pocket; as per DIN 3440; intrinsically safe; with lock
RAK 74.4/3715M 120/100/80 20 800 90 270
RAK 74.4/3720M 160/140/120 20 800 90 270
T
RAK 74.4/3797M 200/180/160 20 800 90 270
Xs
Max. contact rating 2) Transport and storage temperature –25...55 °C
Xsd
Terminal 1-2 TW, TB 10 (2.6) A 250 V~ Permissible ambient temp. (head) 0...50 °C (T50)
Terminal 11-12 STB 10 (6) A 250 V~ as clamp-on sensor (water temp.) max. 120 °C
Terminal 1-4 TW 4 (0.6) A 250 V~ Degree of protection IP 40 (EN 60529)
Min. contact rating 500 mA 40V Protection class I (IEC 60536)
3 2
Time constant in water DIN register number
without pocket < 15 s Thermostat module TR 706 01
with LW 7 pocket < 45 s Thermostat module STB 1060 2000 1
Calibrated at TW, TB 23 ± 2 °C (Tu 23) Not registered for PED B01571
STB 37 ± 2 °C (Tu 37)
Influence of head temperature Wiring diagram TW A09728
depends on type 0.20 – 0.60 K/K TB, STB A09729
Weight 0.22 kg Dimension drawing M05633
Fitting instructions MV 505803
Accessories
364433 001* Indicator lamp: 250 V~ for showing the switching status on the monitor
364435 001 Two plugs to maintain degree of protection IP 40; for clamp-on and double
thermostat
380696 001 Strap for fitting onto pipes of ½"...3"; as clamp-on thermostat T < 120 °C for RAK
As stem-type thermostat: (see Page 29.01 or 29.001 for further details on pockets)
226807 . . . LW 7 pockets; of brass; R½; for one sensor cartridge
364244 . . . LW 15 pockets; of brass; R½, for 2-3 sensor cartridges
364142 000* Distance piece, 110 mm long, only for use in thick insulation or when T > 130 °C
As thermostat with remote sensor:
296724 000* Sensor holder for wall mounting
303212 000* Rubber grommet for capillary-tube guide in air ducts; T < 50 °C
364140 000* Tension-relief piece for fitting in protective tubes.
364432 001* Fixing bracket for wall or duct mounting
364434 001* Supporting coil for sensor, for direct fitting in air ducts
036787 000* Grommet for capillary tube, with packing box; R½, brass, 12 bar, 180 °C
*) Dimension drawing and/or wiring diagram are available under the same number
1) Settings (via catches) are irreversible
2) If under inductive load, take RC circuit into account.
Sauter Components 7 121610 003 P8

21.610/2 RAK
Operation
The single-pole change-over contacts function according to temperature. The adjustable setpoint
Xs equals the upper switching point. The switching difference XSd is fixed. By dovetailing their
housings together, two units can be linked to each other side by side, thereby easily allowing a
double thermostat (controller-monitor or monitor-limiter) to be employed.
On reaching the setpoint, the contacts change over and lock mechanically. Not until the temperature
has fallen can the thermostat be reset by pressing the internal ‘Reset’ knob.
Additional technical details

Setting accuracy ± 6 K at 50 °C Sensor medium:-
as a limiter +0/–9 K at 50 °C up to 160 °C polyalfaelefine
as a clamp-on sensor +4 K (systematic error) up to 230 °C terphenylene
Serviceable life > 100 000 switchings CAS no.: 63148-62-9
when used as a limiter > 15 000 switchings On the basis of the information currently available,
Degree of radio interference click rate < 5 (EN 55014) no risks to health or to the environment can be ex-
Material:- pected if used in accordance with regulations.
Housing base PA reinforced to 120°C
Housing lid ABS, resistant to 80°C Conforms to low-voltage directive 73/23EWG (EN 60730-1;2-9)
Window PC, resistant to 80°C Conforms to EMC directive 89/336/EWG as per EN 55014: 4.2
These thermostats should not be used to guarantee the safety of installations which are subject to
regulation 97/23/EG concerning pressure equipment.
Influence of temperature of instrument head
Type Calibration tolerance Correction factor *)
RAK . . . .M K K/K
3773 ±6 0.14
3770 ±6 0.29
3728 ±6 0.18
3754 ±6 0.31
3726 ±7 0.19
3729 ±7 0.34
3753 ±8 0.25
3727, 3768 +0 /-9 0.31
3782 ±6 0.32
3783 ±7 0.38
3715 +0 /-12 0.54
3720 +0 /-12 0.58
3797 +0 /-13 0.63
*) with respect to the ambient temperature
Technical notes
RC circuit under inductive load
For the optimum RC circuit, see specifications supplied by the manufacturer of the contactors, relays
etc. If, however, these are not available, the following rule of thumb (not binding) can be used to
reduce the inductive load:-
• Capacitance of the RC circuit (µF) ≥ operating current (A)
B03772
• Resistance of the RC circuit (Ω) ≈ coil resistance (Ω)
Wiring diagram Dimension drawing
Controller, monitor, limiter

41
T
L
1 2 4
A09728
110
l
Safety limiter
T Ø6,5
11 12 14
A09729a
25 Pg11
68 20,8
66,8
M05633a
Sauter Components 7 121610 003 P8

RAK 21.610/3
Accessories
296724 303212
Ø12...14
Ø16,5
15
Ø11
Ø9
20
9,2
50
2
25
20
28,5
M00162a
4
6
50 M00328c
364142
s22
Ø22
Ø27
364432 Ø22
12,5 13,5
115
M05639a
036787
30
144313
Ø5,8
60 R1/2
73
M05638
33 11,5
50 s27
M00323
364140
1,8...2
3,2
364434
15
,2
17
70
Ø16
Ø22
M00161b
Min. Ø11
364433
Max. 200 M06140
M06139
Sauter Components 7 121610 003 M5

21.610/4 RAK
Fitting methods
LW7
60
Ø9
R1/2
L
Ø5,8
13
B05634a
B05635
47
8,7
l
89
Ø4,5
R min = 5
l > 70
B05637a
B05636c
3720M
3797M
RAK ...3715M
Ø12
Ø16
min. Ø75
LW15
5 B09826a
Ø12
min. Ø75
Printed in Switzerland
Right of amendment reserved B06144a
R min = 5 B09827
N.B.: A comma between cardinal
numbers denotes a decimal point
© Fr. Sauter AG, CH-4016 Basle
7 121610 003 P6
Sauter Components
VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES
10.9 El controlar

Pressure Gauge type 2750
With liquid filling
Design Industrial pressure gauge with liquid filling.

Intented where pulsation or vibration exists.
Suitable for media that will not attack
copper alloy parts
Case diameter Dim 63 or 100 mm
Case filling Glycerine 99,7%
Accuracy Case dim 63 = kl. 1,6%

Case dim 100 = kl. 1,0%
Case Stock finish stainless steel
Window PMMA-plastic
Pressure element Copper alloy
Pressure unit Bar/Pascal or Bar
Pressure connection Case dim 63 = G1/4"

Case dim 100 = G3/8" or G1/2"
Pressure entry Radial or back pressure entry
Working Pressure 75% of full scale range by fluctuating pressure.

Case dim 63 By short time pressure, full scale value.
PRESSURE RANGE
Working Pressure 90% of full scale range by fluctuating pressure.
Case dim 100 Full scale value by steady pressure. PRESSURE
By short time pressure1,3 x full scale value. 0,6 bar
1 bar
Weather Protection IP 65
1,6 bar
Operating temperature -20+60° C 2,5 bar
4 bar
6 bar
10 bar
16 bar
25 bar
40 bar
60 bar
100 bar
160 bar
Type Description 250 bar
400 bar
2750 Radial pressure entry 600 bar
1000 bar
2754 Radial pressure entry with triangular bezel for panel
1600 bar
2755 Radial pressure entry with back flange VACUUM
–1/0 bar
2751 Back pressure entry
–1/+1,5 bar
2757 Back pressure entry with front flange for panel –1/+3 bar
–1/+5 bar
2758 Back pressure entry with triangular bezel for panel
–1/+9 bar
AB Svenska Industri Instrument SINI Visiting Address Telephone Telefax e-mail Internet
Head office Box 8923, SE-402 73 Göteborg Exportgatan 38 D +46 (0) 31-742 56 00 +46 (0) 31-742 56 01 info@sini.se www.sini.se
Branch office Box 1208, SE-751 42 Uppsala Suttungsgränd 3 +46 (0) 18-10 00 33 +46 (0) 18-10 00 44 (utg.96.01) E02.05
Pressure Gauge type 2750
With liquid filling
2750 dim 63 och 100 2755 dim 63 och 100
2751 dim 63 2751 dim 100
2757 dim 63 2757 dim 100
2758 dim 63 2758 dim 100
Dim Ø a b b2 d1 D1 D2 e f G h±1 SW weight
63 13 56 32 85 68 62 6,5 - G 1/4” 54 14 0,2
100 15,5 81,5 48 132 107 100 8 - G 3/8” or G 1/2” 87 22 0,8

VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES
10.9 El controlar

Original
MINIMESS 1620
Test with confidence
Limburg
Messen mit System
Deutsch/English
MINIMESS 1620 Schraubkupplung MINIMESS 1620 Test Point
Standardausführung: Schraubkappe in Metall Standard-design: With metal cap
¿20
Wahlweise mit
Schraubkappe in Kunststoff
H +3 mm
H Design with plastic cap
SW
i
Gewinde Abdichtungsart Anziehdreh- p max H i SW Bestell-Nummer Bestell-Nummer

G
thread sealing details moment in mm in mm in mm mit Metall-Kappe mit Kunststoff-Kappe
torque Part number Part number
in Nm with metal cap with plastic-cap
M 8x1 6 250 bar (3600 psi) 41 8,5 17 2103-01-32.00 2103-30-32.00

O-Ring / Form G
M 10 x 1 12 37,5 8,5 17 2103-01-33.00 2103-30-33.00
M 12 x 1,5 30 36 10 17 2103-01-13.00 2103-30-13.00

630 bar (9000 psi)
M 14 x 1,5 Gi-Ring / Form F 40 36 10 19 2103-01-14.00 2103-30-14.00
M 16 x1,5 60 36 10 22 2103-01-15.00 2103-30-15.00
ISO 228-G 1/8 18 400 bar (5800 psi) 38 8 17 2103-01-17.00 2103-30-17.00
ISO 228-G 1/4 Gi-Ring / Form F 40 36 10 19 2103-01-18.00 2103-30-18.00

630 bar (9000 psi)
ISO 228-G 3/8 60 36 10 22 2103-01-16.00 2103-30-16.00
1/8 NPTF Selbstdichtendes - 400 bar (5800 psi) 33 13 17 2103-01-46.00 2103-30-46.00

Gewinde / Form H
Self sealing thread
1/4 NPTF form H - 33 16,5 17 2103-01-47.00 2103-30-47.00
7/16-20 UNF 20 630 bar (9000 psi) 37 9 17 2103-01-21.00 2103-30-21.00

O-Ring / Form E
9/16-18 UNF 35 36 10 19 2103-01-53.00 2103-30-53.00
ISO 7/I-R 1/8 Geeignete Dichtmittel - 400 bar (5800 psi) 33 13 17 2103-01-40.00 2103-30-40.00
Form C
Sealing by suitable 630 bar (9000 psi)
ISO 7/I-R 1/4 jointing solutions - 33 13 17 2103-01-41.00 2103-30-41.00
M 10 x 1 12 38 9,5 17 2103-01-94.00 2103-30-94.00
M 12 x 1,5 O-Ring / Form E 30 35,5 11 17 2103-01-95.00 2103-30-95.00
630bar (9000 psi)
M 14 x 1,5 nach ISO 6149-2 45 35,5 11,5 19 2103-01-96.00 2103-30-96.00
M 16 x 1,5 55 35,5 12,5 22 2103-01-97.00 2103-30-97.00
Optionen Options
Mit montierter Vibrationssicherung (Perbunan) Additionally mounted safety device (Buna N)

für Schraubkappe in Metall against vibration, design with metal cap
(Bei Bestellung Austausch der Endziffern 00 in 98) (When ordering please exchange the end number 00 for 98) 98
Vitonausführung der Schraubkupplung All sealings of the screw coupling in Viton

Gilt für Metall- und Kunststoff-Kappe Valid for metal- and plastic cap design
Bei Metall-Kappe ohne Vibrationssicherung metal cap design without safety device
(Bei Bestellung Austausch der Endziffern 00 in 10) (When ordering please exchange the end number 00 for 10) 10
Schraubkupplungen mit EPDM-Dichtung für Brems- Screw couplings with EPDM-sealing for brake fluid and
flüssigkeit bzw. für andere Medien auf Anfrage. other fluids on request.
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten We reserve the right to make technical modifications. 7
Meßstutzen, Meßverschraubungen, Standpipe adaptor, Tee adaptor,
DKO-Meßstutzen screwed type, DKO measuring connection
für lötlose Rohrverschraubungen nach DIN 2353 for solderfree screw-in pipe connections acc. to DIN 2353
Meßstutzen Meßverschraubungen DKO-Meßstutzen

Meßstutzen mit montierter Kupplung Meßverschraubung mit montierter DKO-Meßstutzen mit 24-Dichtkegel und montierter Kupplung.
ohne Schneidring und Überwurf- Kupplung und Schneidring mit Elastischer Perbunan-O-Ring am Dichtkegel.
mutter. Überwurfmutter. * (Bitte beachten Sie die höheren Druckangaben in der Tabelle)
Standpipe adaptor with coupling Tee adaptor, screwed type with DKO measuring connection with 24  sealing cone and coupling fitted. Elastic
fitted without cutting ring and union coupling fitted and cutting ring with Buna N O-ring at sealing cone.
nut. union nut. * (Please observe higher pressure values as per table)
ø20 H ø 20 ø 20 ø 20
L0
L0
SW 1
SW 17
L0
SW17 SW 17
SW 2 Sicherungsring
ø15 SW
SW
L2
ød
G
L1
G
L2 G
ød ød
ca. L1
ød
* (Bei Verwendung von DKO-Anschlüssen gelten
die höheren Druckangaben, siehe Tabelle)
* (When DKO connections are used, higher
pressure values are valid, see table)
Bild /figure 1 Bild /figure 2
Meßstutzen Meßverschraubungen DKO-Meßstutzen

Standpipe adaptor Tee adaptor DKO-measuring connection
Reihe p max Gewinde L1 L2 L 0 Bestell Nr. L1 L2 H SW1 SW2 Bestell Nr. Bild L 0 SW Bestell Nr.
model G
ød thread Part-Number Part-Number fig. Part-Number
L 6 M 12 x 1,5 20 37 74,5 2103-15-06.00 50,5 20,5 49,5 24 14 2103-11-06.00 52 14 2103-93-06.00
L 8 250/315* bar M 14 x 1,5 20 37 74,5 2103-15-08.00 50,5 20,5 49,5 24 17 2103-11-08.00 52 17 2103-93-08.00
L 10 M 16 x 1,5 22 39 76,5 2103-15-10.00 52,5 22,5 49,5 24 19 2103-11-10.00 1 52 19 2103-93-10.00
L 12 3600/4500* psi M 18 x 1,5 22 39 76,5 2103-15-12.00 52,5 22,5 49,5 24 22 2103-11-12.00 52 22 2103-93-12.00
L 15 M 22 x 1,5 - 28 65,5 2103-15-15.00 54,5 24,5 52,5 30 27 2103-11-15.00 52 27 2103-93-15.00
160/315* bar
L 18 2300/4500* psi M 26 x 1,5 56,5 23,5 53,5 32 32 2103-11-18.00 52 32 2103-93-18.00
160 bar
L 22 2300 psi M 30 x 2 60,5 27,5 55,5 36 36 2103-11-22.00 60 36 2103-40-22.00
L 28 M 36 x 2 60,5 27,5 58 41 41 2103-11-28.00 2 61 41 2103-40-28.00
100/160* bar
L 35 M 45 x 2 68,5 25,5 60,5 46 50 2103-11-35.00 63 50 2103-40-35.00
1450/2300* psi
L 42 M 52 x 2 70,5 24,5 65 55 60 2103-11-42.00 63 60 2103-40-42.00
S 6 M 14 x 1,5 20 37 74,5 2103-15-06.00 54,5 24,5 49,5 24 17 2103-12-06.00 52 17 2103-94-06.00
S 8 630 bar M 16 x 1,5 20 37 74,5 2103-15-08.00 54,5 24,5 49,5 24 19 2103-12-08.00 52 19 2103-94-08.00
S 10 M 18 x 1,5 22 39 76,5 2103-15-10.00 56,5 23,5 49,5 24 22 2103-12-10.00 1 52 22 2103-94-10.00
9000 psi
S 12 M 20 x 1,5 22 39 76,5 2103-15-12.00 56,5 23,5 49,5 24 24 2103-12-12.00 52 24 2103-94-12.00
S 14 M 22 x 1,5 62,5 26,5 51 27 27 2103-12-14.00 2 63 27 2103-41-14.00
S 16 M 24 x 1,5 62,5 25,5 52,5 30 30 2103-12-16.00 1 52 30 2103-94-16.00
400 bar
S 20 M 30 x 2 68,5 25,5 55,5 36 36 2103-12-20.00 2 63 36 2103-41-20.00
5800 psi
S 25 M 36 x 2 74,5 26,5 58 41 46 2103-12-25.00 64,5 46 2103-41-25.00
250/400* bar
S 30 3600/5800* psi M 42 x 2 80,5 27,5 60,5 46 50 2103-12-30.00 66 50 2103-41-30.00
250/315* bar
S 38 3600/4500* psi M 52 x 2 91 29 65 55 60 2103-12-38.00 69 60 2103-41-38.00
Optionen Options
Wahlweise mit montierter Schraubkappe in Kunststoff mit integrierter Vibrationssicherung Plastic screw cap provided with integrated safety device against vibration
(Bei Bestellung Austausch der beiden Endziffern 00 in 90) (when ordering please exchange the end number 00 for 90)
90
Zusätzlich montierte Vibrationssicherung (Perbunan) für Schraubkappe in Metall Additionaly mounted safety device (Buna N) against vibration, design with metal
(Bei Bestellung Austausch der beiden Endziffern 00 in 98) cap (when ordering please exchange the end number 00 for 98) 98
Alle Dichtungen in Viton für Ausführung Schraubkappe in Metall All sealings of Viton, design with metal cap
(when ordering please exchange the end number 00 for 10)
10
(Bei Bestellung Austausch der beiden Endziffern 00 in 10)
Alle Dichtungen in Viton für Ausführung Schraubkappe in Kunststoff All sealings of Viton, design with plastic cap
8 (Bei Bestellung Austausch der beiden Endziffern 00 in 95) (when ordering please exchange the end number 00 for 95) 95
VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES
10.10 Otros

VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES
10.10 Otros

TIPO “FL” ACCTO. POR PALANCA CAPITULO
DIMENSIONES GENERALES FL - 0002 - DT 4
PÁGINA
DN. 250 -350

PALANCA TIPO “MR” NOTA: Con DN.350 la PALANCA TIPO “MR”
Regulación en todas solo es recomendable en BAJA PRESION
las posiciones
DN DIMENSIONES GENERALES
mm Pulg A B C D E F G H J K L M PESO
DN. 32-200
32 1 ¼” 102.5 60.25 33 70 65 12 90 227.8 100 85 195 26 1.9
PALANCA TIPO “MN”
40 1 ½” 132 61 33 76 65 12 90 258 110 98.6 195 26 2.4
Enclavamiento cada 15º
º 50 2” 140 80 43 108 65 12 90 285 125 120.7 195 26 3.5
65 2 ½” 154 91 46 123 65 12 90 310 145 139.7 195 26 3.9
80 3” 160 100 46 137 65 12 90 325 160 152.4 195 26 4.2
100 4” 180 114 52 165 65 12 90 359 190.5 180 257 26 5.4
125 5” 197 130 56 191 65 16 90 392 215.9 210 257 26 6.5
150 6” 210 145 56 218 65 16 90 420 241.3 240 257 26 7.8
200 8” 240 175 60 265 65 16 90 480 298.5 295 257 26 11
250 10” 282.5 220 68 328 135 24 175 637.5 362 350 495 32 22.6 INDICE
300 12” 308 250.5 78 380 135 24 175 693.5 431.8 400 495 32 32.7
350 14” 338.5 299 78 430 135 24 175 772.5 476.3 460 495 32 38.7
TIPO “FL” - “FLN” CAPITULO
DESPIECE DE MATERIALES FL - 0007 - DT 4
PÁGINA
18 ARANDELA ESTRE. DIN 6798 ACERO PAVONADO (DN. 250-350) 1

17 JUNTA TORICA CASQUILLO NITRILO 6
16 ARANDELA SEGURIDAD COBRE 1
15 TUERCA DIN 934 ACERO CINCADO 2
14 JUNTA TORICA DE EJE NITRILO 1
13 TIRANTE ACERO. INOX. AISI 304 1
12 TORNILLO C/ ALLEN ACERO CINCADO DN. 32/200 DIN 7991 1
DN. 250/800 DIN 912 4
11 JUNTA TORICA DE TAPA NITRILO 1
10 TAPA INFERIOR ALUMINIO RECUB. EPOXY 1
9 ANILLO ELASTICO CUERPO ACERO NIQUELADO DN.40/200 DIN 984 1
DN.250/800 DIN 472
DATOS TECNICOS 8 ARANDELA RETENCION EJE ACERO NIQUELADO DIN 6799 1
Montaje: Entre bridas DIN PN 10/16 - ASA 150 Lbs 7 EJE INFERIOR ACERO INOX. AISI 420 1
Temperatura Max. de Utilización.......110ºC (EPDM) 6 MARIPOSA ( 3 ) FUND. NOD. DIN GGG-40 EPOXY BISPHENOL 1
Presión Máx. de Servicio: MARIPOSA ( 1 ) ACERO INOX. A351 CF8
FL - FLN (DN.32-150)...................16 Kg/cm2 MARIPOSA ( 5 ) ACERO INOX. A351 CF8M
FL - FLN (DN.200 - 800)...............10 Kg/cm2 MARIPOSA ( 4 ) BRONCE-ALUMINIO
PRUEBA HIDROSTÁTICA Y DE RESISTENCIA 5 ANILLO E.P.D.M. 1
4 EJE SUPERIOR ACERO INOX. AISI 420 1
CON VALVULA ABIERTA 3 RETEN Y JUNTA TORICA NITRILO 1
FL - FLN (DN.32-150)...................24 Kg/cm2
2 CASQUILLO ROZAMIENTO ACETAL DELRIN (DN. 32-400) 1
FL - FLN (DN.200 - 800)...............15 Kg/cm2
CON VALVULA CERRADA BRONCE DIN 1705 (DN. 450.800) 2
FL - FLN (DN.32-150)................17.6 Kg/cm2 1 CUERPO DE VALVULA FUND. GRIS DIN GG-25 RECUB. EPOXY 1 INDICE
FUND. GRIS DIN GGG-40
FL - FLN (DN.200 - 800)...............11 Kg/cm2
POS DESIGNACION MATERIAL OBSERVACIONES CANT
VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES
10.10 Otros

Detectores de posición IP 67 de reducidas dimensiones: serie 83 870
Conformes a las normas Referencias

CEI / EN 60947.5.1 Estándar
Conformidad dimensional: Pulsador ó rodillo a 90°
Directiva Baja Tensión: Protección contra choques eléctricos. NFC 20030 Referencias de productos estándar (cable longitud 1 m) *
o CEI 60536 clase 1, grado de contaminación 3.
Organos de mando
Pulsador metálico
Drado de protección Pulsador metálico de rodillo
Según 62529 : IP 66 / 67 Pulsador metálico y collar roscado
Según NEMA 250 : Type 1, 3, 4, 6, 13 Pulsador de rodillo – metálico y collar roscado
Palanca de rodillo acero metálica (2 sentidos de ataque)
Características mecánicas
Función
Fuerza de mando mín. N (cmN)
Elemento de contacto con 2 sentidos de doble ruptura con 4 bornes
Fuerza de carrera total mín. N (cmN)
(forma Zb) de maniobra positiva de los contactos de apertura (NC). Los 2 Fuerza mínima de apertura positiva
contactos móviles están eléctricamente separados. Duración mecánica 106 ciclos
Masa g
Principio
Contacto de acción brusca independiente Secuencia
Marrón Negro Posiciones: datos nominales
BN BK
Zb
BU BK GN-YW Dimensiones
Azul Negro Verde-Amarillo 83 870 0
Ver diagrama
Características eléctricas secuencias
20
Tensión asignada de impulso máxima admisible (Uimp) : 2500 V
Tensión asignada de aislamiento (Ui) : 500 V Ø8 r = 0,5
5,6
2,6
Corriente térmica (Ith) : 10 A
9
PRP
Conmutación con carga pequeña: tensión mínima 10 V

intensidad mínima 100 mA
Categoría de empleo :
según CEI 947.5.1 AC15 = 250 V / 6 A
DC 13 = 24 V / 8 A Ø 8 x 4,3 16
40
según UL 508 A300 - Q150
Protección eléctrica
Hilo de masa incorporado
Dispositivo de protección contra cortocircuitos: CEI 947.5.1 30
Fusible 6 AgC
7 Conexiones
Cable de 5 conductores HO5VF de 0,75 mm2, Ø ext. 8 mm (*) Otras longitudes de cables:
cambiar el último dígito de la referencia estándar:
Homologaciones
UL 508, UL 50 2 : longitud 2 m
3 : longitud 3 m
6 : longitud 6 m
Otras informaciones
Otros accesorios, contactos especiales, o para funcionamiento especial : consúltennos
7/16
1
83 870 0 83 871 0 83 872 0 83 873 0 83 874 0
83 875 0 83 876 0
83 870 001 ★ 83 871 001 ▲ 83 872 001 ▲ 83 873 001 ★ 83 874 001 ▲ 2
●
●
●
●
●
10 10 10 (15) 10
30 30 30 (35) 30
28 28 28 15 28
10 10 10 10 10
290 295 315 290 310
BK-BK BK-BK BK-BK BK-BK BK-BK

BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU
BK-BK BK-BK BK-BK BK-BK BK-BK

BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU
PRP PA POP PFC PRP PA POP PFC PRP PA POP PFC PRP PA POP PFC PRP PA POP PFC
19,8 18 15,8 14,7 29,9 28 25,75 24,75 45 43,1 40,85 39,85 0° 27° 58° 69° 34,8 33 30,8 29,7
83 871 0 83 872 0 83 873 0 83 874 0

23,6
2,6
M12 x 0,75
3,4
Ø 11 Ø 11
3,4
7
83 875 0 83 876 0
M12 x 0,75
Ø 10
Ø 11
Ø 10
Para pasar pedido, precisar :
Productos estándar
2 Referencia
Ejemplo : Detector de posición 83 871 001
Productos catálogo
realizados bajo pedido 1 Tipo
Ejemplos : Detector de posición 83 871 003 ; Longitud del cable = 3 m - Detector de posición 83 871 006 ; Longitud del cable = 6 m
7/17
VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES
10.10 Otros

VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES
10.10 Otros

VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES
10.10 Otros

Cylinder mounting no 85 = eye with spherical bearing
Cylinder dimension 25/16 - 32/20, stroke over 100 mm.
4
C + STROKE *
Cylinder dimension 40/25 - 1OO/6O
l-
C + STROKE -
Ini
Bare Rad Shady parts describes Rod options.
0 0 C IDIEIFIGIHII I K IL
*C increase if the connection is placed otherwise.

We reseive the right to make changes without further notice
VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES
10.10 Otros

RajaWin32 V20060502 (c) Rajalovejoy 1992-20
® ®
Raja-Lovejoy GmbH
Friedrichstrasse 6 Postbox 1546
Germany 58775 Werdohl
Tel: 02392/5090 Fax: 02392/509509
sales@raja-lovejoy.com
406.4 234
160 26
50
50
26
ø355.6
ø450
ø125
ø301
ø350
ø95
ø75
1.5
5.15
10
58
133.35
M12
ø20
customer Metso Minerals AB

no. of inquiry/order
date 30.5.2006
technical changes reserved.
pump PARKER PV 032 / 040 / 046**K..

Caution Selection only for single pumps
NEMA "B"-motor 1800 RPM 50.00 HP 326 TD ø450
Raja-bellhousing RV450/234/240/TD
Raja-coupling Spidex A42/55.P-32H7 GG spider 92°Sh (white)
Internetversion
pump hub GG 32H7 (L=50.0)

motor hub GG P (L=50.0)
spider spider 92°Sh (white)
pump hub ø32 mm, pump shaft stands off : 5.15 mm
motor hub ø53.95 mm, motor shaft stands off : 1.5 mm
RajaWin32 V20051104 (c) Rajalovejoy 1992-2005
® ®
ø450
ø348
ø135
7.9
ø127
10.74
79.5
85
40
350
85
4.04
215.9
26
ø160
ø457.2
ø550
ø20
Tel: 08-520 17545 Fax: 08-520 18812

508
181
M16
info@hn-drivelement.se
S-14922 Nynäshamn
H.N. Drivelement AB
Box 144
customer
no. of inquiry/order
date 30.5.2006
pump VICKERS V Series 45VT*S..203..L(R)
Caution Selection only for single pumps
technical changes reserved.
NEMA "F"-motor 1800 RPM 125.00 HP 444 TD ø550

bellh. assembly R550/350/275/TD/ZR
Raja-bellhousing R550/350/275/TD
center ring ZR127.0x148.0x4.0
Raja-coupling Spidex A75/90.WA-C GG spider 92°Sh (white)
pump hub GG C (L=85.0)
Drivelement
motor hub GG WA (L=85.0)

spider spider 92°Sh (white)
pump hub ø38.07 mm, pump shaft stands off : 10.74 mm
motor hub ø85.78 mm, motor shaft protudes : 4.04 mm
VPA 1530-60
10. APÉNDICES
10.10 Otros

Liquid heating 3:14
Backer BHV AB
Screw plug oil immersion heaters
35 Insertion length NV 74
Tubular elements of stainless steel AISI 316L.

Brass plug G 2”
Protective tubing with inner diameter 10.6 mm
for thermostat and/or thermal cut-off
Approx. 2,7 W/cm2
Type Power Voltage Insertion Article

W V length mm number
OE 31 1000 230/400 270 25 30 34 14 05

OE 33 2000 230/400 435 25 30 34 14 01
OE 34 3000 230/400 555 25 30 34 14 02
OE 36 4500 230/400 815 25 30 34 14 03
OE 39 6000 230/400 1085 25 30 34 14 04
Approx. 0,9 W/cm2
Type Power Voltage Insertion Article

W V length mm number
OE 311 330 230/400 270 25 30 49 02 05

OE 331 670 230/400 435 25 30 49 02 01
OE 341 1000 230/400 555 25 30 49 02 02
OE 361 1500 230/400 815 25 30 49 02 03
OE 391 2000 230/400 1085 25 30 49 02 04
Accessories – see section 7

2002.10
www.backer.se

Manual Filtro de Prensa

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Manual Filtro de Prensa

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

INAB Automaton AB

Customer: Metso Minerals (Sala) AB

Ustomer de C: L-260 302

Máquina: VPA 1530-60

Proyecto: Cerro Corona, Peru

DESCRIPCIÒN DEL FUNCIONAMIENTO 1

INSTRUCCIONES PARA EL SISTEMA HIDRÁULICO 2

PLANOS Y ESQUEMAS DE DATOS 9

HOJAS DE DATOS, APÉNDICES 1 - 10. 10

Edición 1 L-260 302 06-W22 Index 0 1/1

Dibujo de la disposición L1-060504-303

1. DESCRIPCIÓN DEL FUNCIONAMIENTO

El sistema hidráulico consiste en:

1.1 Depósito hidráulico

1.2 Sistema de baja presión

1.3 Sistema de alta presión

edición 1 L-260 302 06-W22 Descripción del funcionamiento 1 / hidráulico 1/5

1.1 Depósito hidráulico

- Mirilla con termómetro

- Monitor de nivel 18 con microinterruptores

- Monitor de temperatura 19 , ajuste adecuado 20 a 95Cº

1.2 Sistema de baja presión

El sistema de baja presión consiste en 4 bombas (8),

Cuatro filtros de paso total (12, 13, 14 y 15) con indicador

1 filtro de paso total (93) con indicador visual de suciedad va

edición 1 L-260 302 06-W22 Descripción del funcionamiento 1 / hidráulico 2/5

1.2.2 Válvulas limitadoras de presión

Las válvulas limitadoras de presión (38, 39, 40 y 41) limitan la

1.3 Sistema de alta presión

La bomba de alta presión (5) es una bomba de émbolo de

edición 1 L-260 302 06-W22 Descripción del funcionamiento 1 / hidráulico 3/5

1.4.1 La prensa se encuentra en posición abierta.

Entonces los cilindros comienzan a cerrar la prensa.

Las válvulas de retención (42 a 45) no permiten que llegue

edición 1 L-260 302 06-W22 Descripción del funcionamiento 1 / hidráulico 4/5

Se retrae el imán A en la válvula (25)H2.

Las compuertas son controladas por las válvulas

Los cierres hidráulicos (56 y 57) mantienen las compuertas en

edición 1 L-260 302 06-W22 Descripción del funcionamiento 1 / hidráulico 5/5

2. INSTRUCCIONES PARA EL SISTEMA HIDRÁULICO

2.2 Normas de seguridad

edición 1 L-260 302 06-W22 Instalación hidráulica 1/3

2. INSTRUCCIONES PARA EL SISTEMA HIDRÁULICO

Para que la instalación funcione debidamente durante largo

- las instrucciones de instalación y oeración

- los datos técnicos en las hojas de datos bajo la solapa 10

2.2 Normas de seguridad

Leer el manual de operación y mantenimiento en su totalidad

Las tareas de mantenimiento mecánico o eléctrico

Una persona responsable deberá inspeccionar

- el trabajo ha sido realizado correctamente

edición 1 L-260 302 06-W22 Instalación hidráulica 2/3

- funcionamiento del equipo de seguridad

Si surge una situación de emergencia, parar el equipo

Las autoridades locales de salud y seguridad pueden

Evitar la soldadura en equipos mecánicos o eléctricos.

- no efectuar la soldadura mientras no se haya

INAB Automation AB no acepta responsabilidad alguna de

edición 1 L-260 302 06-W22 Instalación hidráulica 3/3

3.1 Instrucciones de seguridad

3.3 Sistema de tuberías

3.4 Componentes hidráulicos

3.4.1 Válvulas hidráulicas

3.4.2 Otros componentes hidráulicos